Av PDF

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
AV
A
B
SECTION
AUDIO, VISUAL & NAVIGATION SYSTEM C
E
CONTENTS
MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro- F
cedure ......................................................................29
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 13
MICROPHONE ...........................................................30
G
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW .........13 MICROPHONE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................30
Work Flow ............................................................... 13
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 32
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 15 Description ...............................................................32 H
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
AUDIO SYSTEM .................................................15
System Diagram ...................................................... 15 TWEETER ......................................................... 34
Description ...............................................................34 I
System Description ................................................. 15
Component Parts Location ...................................... 16 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................34
Component Description ........................................... 17
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 36 J
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM .......................18 Description ...............................................................36
System Diagram ...................................................... 18 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
System Description ................................................. 18 K
Component Parts Location ...................................... 19
SUBWOOFER ................................................... 38
Component Description ........................................... 20 Description ...............................................................38
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ................21 L
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 21
STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 41
Description ...............................................................41
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON- Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................41
M
TROL UNIT) ........................................................25
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 44
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 25
Description ...............................................................44
Work Flow ............................................................... 25
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................44 AV
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 27 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 46
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......27
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 46 O
AUDIO UNIT .............................................................. 27 Reference Value ......................................................46
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ....................... 27
DISPLAY UNIT .................................................. 49
P
SUBWOOFER AMP .................................................. 27 Reference Values ....................................................49
SUBWOOFER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 27
SUBWOOFER AMP .......................................... 50
DISPLAY UNIT .......................................................... 28 Reference Value ......................................................50
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 28
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ...................... 51
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT .............................. 29 Reference Value ......................................................51
Revision: August 2013 AV-1 2014 Maxima NAM

WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 54 TEL ANTENNA .................................................. 87
Removal and Installation ......................................... 87
MONOCHROME DISPLAY ................................ 54
Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio system ...... 54 BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT ......................... 88
Removal and Installation ......................................... 88
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 66 MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 66 BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 89
Symptom Table ...................................................... 66
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ......... 89
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 69 Work Flow ............................................................... 89
Description .............................................................. 69
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 91
PRECAUTION ............................................. 71
AUDIO SYSTEM ................................................ 91
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 71 System Diagram ..................................................... 91
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System System Description ................................................. 91
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- Component Parts Location ..................................... 92
SIONER" ................................................................. 71 Component Description .......................................... 92
Precaution for Work ................................................ 71
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ...................... 94
PREPARATION ........................................... 72 System Diagram ..................................................... 94
System Description ................................................. 94
PREPARATION ................................................. 72
Component Parts Location ..................................... 95
Special Service Tool ............................................... 72
Component Description .......................................... 96
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 72
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT) ............... 97
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 73 Diagnosis Description ............................................. 97
AUDIO UNIT ...................................................... 73 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON-
Removal and Installation ........................................ 73
TROL UNIT) ...................................................... 101
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 75 Diagnosis Description ........................................... 101
Removal and Installation ........................................ 75 Work Flow ............................................................. 101
FRONT TWEETER ............................................ 76 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 102

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 102
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 77
AUDIO UNIT ............................................................ 102
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 102
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................... 78 DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 102
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 102
SUBWOOFER .................................................... 79 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ........................................... 103
Removal and Installation ........................................ 79 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 103
SUBWOOFER AMP ........................................... 80 BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ............................ 104
Removal and Installation ........................................ 80 BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
cedure ................................................................... 104
STEERING SWITCH .......................................... 81
Removal and Installation ........................................ 81 MICROPHONE ........................................................ 105
MICROPHONE : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 105
AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................. 82
Location of Antenna ................................................ 82 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 107
Window Antenna Repair ......................................... 82 Description ............................................................ 107
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107
ANTENNA AMP. ................................................ 85
Removal and Installation ........................................ 85 TWEETER ......................................................... 110
Description ............................................................ 110
MICROPHONE ................................................... 86 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 113

Description ............................................................ 113 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 161
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 113 A
AUDIO UNIT .................................................... 161
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 116 Removal and Installation ....................................... 161
Description ............................................................ 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116 AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT ................................... 163 B
Removal and Installation ....................................... 163
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 119
Description ............................................................ 119 FRONT TWEETER .......................................... 164 C
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 119 Removal and Installation ....................................... 164
AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................. 122 CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 165

Description ............................................................ 122 Removal and Installation ....................................... 165 D
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 166
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 123 Removal and Installation ....................................... 166 E
Description ............................................................ 123
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123 REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 167
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 126 F
Description ............................................................ 126 SUBWOOFER ................................................. 168
BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 169 G

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 128
AUDIO UNIT ..................................................... 128
Reference Value ................................................... 128
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 170 H
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 131
Reference Values .................................................. 131
AUDIO ANTENNA ........................................... 171
Location of Antenna ............................................... 171 I
BOSE SPEAKER AMP .................................... 132 Window Antenna Repair ........................................ 171
ANTENNA AMP. ............................................. 174 J
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ..................... 135 Removal and Installation ....................................... 174
MICROPHONE ................................................ 175
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 138 Removal and Installation ....................................... 175 K
MONOCHROME DISPLAY .............................. 138 TEL ANTENNA ............................................... 176

Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio System ......... 138 Removal and Installation ....................................... 176
L
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 153 BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT ...................... 177
AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 153 COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE M
Symptom Table ..................................................... 153
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 178
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 157
Description ............................................................ 157 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 178 AV
Work Flow .............................................................. 178
PRECAUTION ............................................ 159
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 180 O
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 159
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ....................... 180
SIONER" ............................................................... 159 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE P
Precaution for Work .............................................. 159 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
.. 180
PREPARATION ......................................... 160 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Re-
PREPARATION ................................................ 160 pair Requirement ................................................... 180
Special Service Tool ............................................. 160
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 160

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING DTC Logic ............................................................. 209
CONTROL UNIT .......................................................180
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 210
CONTROL UNIT : Description ...............................180 DTC Logic ............................................................. 210
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 211
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ....180
DTC Logic ............................................................. 211
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ...............181
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 212
DTC Logic ............................................................. 212
scription .................................................................181
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Spe- U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 213
cial Repair Requirement ........................................181 DTC Logic ............................................................. 213
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con-
figuration List .........................................................181 U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 214
DTC Logic ............................................................. 214
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 183
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 215
AUDIO SYSTEM .............................................. 183 DTC Logic ............................................................. 215
System Diagram ....................................................183 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 215
System Description ................................................184
Component Parts Location ....................................185 U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 216
Component Description .........................................186 DTC Logic ............................................................. 216
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 187
System Diagram ....................................................187 U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 217
System Description ................................................187 DTC Logic ............................................................. 217
Component Parts Location ....................................188
Component Description .........................................189 U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 218
DTC Logic ............................................................. 218
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM .................... 190 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218
System Diagram ....................................................190
System Description ................................................190 U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 219
Component Parts Location ....................................191 DTC Logic ............................................................. 219
Component Description .........................................192
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 220
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 193 DTC Logic ............................................................. 220
Diagnosis Description ............................................193
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 221
CONSULT Function (MULTI AV) ...........................202
DTC Logic ............................................................. 221
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221
TROL UNIT) ..................................................... 205 U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 222
Diagnosis Description ............................................205
DTC Logic ............................................................. 222
Work Flow ..............................................................205
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 223
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 206 DTC Logic ............................................................. 223
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT .......................... 206 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 223
Description .............................................................206 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 224
DTC Logic ..............................................................206 Description ............................................................ 224
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................206 DTC Logic ............................................................. 224
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 207 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 224
Description .............................................................207 U1263 USB ....................................................... 226
DTC Logic ..............................................................207 DTC Logic ............................................................. 226
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................207 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 226
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 208 U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................. 227
Description .............................................................208 Description ............................................................ 227
DTC Logic ..............................................................208 DTC Logic ............................................................. 227
U1216 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 209 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 227
Description .............................................................209
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................. 229 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 248
Description ............................................................ 229 Description ............................................................. 248 A
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 230
Description ............................................................ 230 TWEETER ....................................................... 250
B
DTC Logic ............................................................. 230 Description ............................................................. 250
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 252 C
AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 231 Description ............................................................. 252
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 231 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252
DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 232 SUBWOOFER ................................................. 254 D
Description ............................................................. 254
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ........................ 233 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 254
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis E
STEERING SWITCH ....................................... 257
Procedure .............................................................. 233
Description ............................................................. 257
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 234 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 257
F
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 234
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........... 259
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 259
REAR VIEW CAMERA ............................................ 235 G
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Description ............. 259
REAR VIEW CAMERA : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 235
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ............................ 236 dure ....................................................................... 259
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro- H
cedure ................................................................... 236 SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................. 262
MICROPHONE ........................................................ 237 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 262

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Description ............. 262 I
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................... 239 dure ....................................................................... 262
Description ............................................................ 239 J
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 239 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 264
Description ............................................................. 264
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............... 240 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 264
K
Description ............................................................ 240
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 240 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 266
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................. 241 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 266 L
Description ............................................................ 241 Reference Value .................................................... 266
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 241 DTC Index ............................................................. 272
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 274 M

RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT ..... 242
Description ............................................................ 242 Reference Value .................................................... 274
SUBWOOFER AMP ........................................ 277 AV
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 243 Reference Value .................................................... 277
Description ............................................................ 243
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ........................... 278
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 243 O
Reference Value .................................................... 278
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG-
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT .................... 280
NAL CIRCUIT ................................................... 244 Reference Value .................................................... 280
Description ............................................................ 244 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 244 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 282
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL COLOR DISPLAY ........................................... 282
CIRCUIT ........................................................... 246 Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio System
Description ............................................................ 246 Without Navigation System ................................... 282
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 304

AUDIO SYSTEM .............................................. 304 AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................ 327
Symptom Table .....................................................304 Location of Antenna .............................................. 327
Window Antenna Repair ....................................... 327
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............. 307
Description .............................................................307 ANTENNA AMP. ............................................... 330
PRECAUTION ............................................ 309
MICROPHONE ................................................. 331
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 309 Removal and Installation ....................................... 331
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 332
SIONER" ................................................................309 Removal and Installation ....................................... 332
Precaution for Work ...............................................309
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT ........................ 333
PREPARATION .......................................... 310 Removal and Installation ....................................... 333
PREPARATION ............................................... 310 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 334

Special Service Tool ..............................................310 Removal and Installation ....................................... 334
Commercial Service Tools .....................................310 Adjustment ............................................................ 334
COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 311
AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 311
Removal and Installation .......................................311 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 335
Work Flow ............................................................. 335
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 313
Removal and Installation .......................................313 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 337
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 314 REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
Removal and Installation .......................................314 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT ...................... 337
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 316 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Description
Removal and Installation .......................................316 . 337
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE
AUX IN JACK .................................................. 317 CENTER POSITION ADJUSTMENT : Special Re-
Removal and Installation .......................................317
pair Requirement .................................................. 337
FRONT TWEETER .......................................... 318 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Removal and Installation .......................................318 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 337
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 319 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 337
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 320 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 337
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) .............. 338
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 321 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
Removal and Installation .......................................321 scription ................................................................. 338
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Spe-
SUBWOOFER AMP ......................................... 322 cial Repair Requirement ....................................... 338
Removal and Installation .......................................322 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con-
figuration List ......................................................... 338
BOSE SPEAKER AMP .................................... 323
Removal and Installation .......................................323 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .......................... 340
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 324 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 340
Removal and Installation .......................................324 System Diagram ................................................... 340
System Description ............................................... 341
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 325 Component Parts Location ................................... 342
Removal and Installation .......................................325 Component Description ........................................ 343
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 326 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM .................... 344
Removal and Installation .......................................326 System Diagram ................................................... 344

System Description ............................................... 344 DTC Logic .............................................................. 374
Component Parts Location .................................... 345 A
Component Description ......................................... 346 U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 375
DTC Logic .............................................................. 375
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM ..................... 347 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 375
System Diagram .................................................... 347 B
System Description ............................................... 347 U1228 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 376
Component Parts Location .................................... 348 DTC Logic .............................................................. 376
Component Description ......................................... 349 C
U1229 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 377
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT).. 350 DTC Logic .............................................................. 377
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 350
U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ........................... 378 D
CONSULT Function (MULTI AV) .......................... 359
DTC Logic .............................................................. 378
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CON- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 378
TROL UNIT) ...................................................... 362 U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 379 E
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 362
DTC Logic .............................................................. 379
Work Flow ............................................................. 362
U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............. 380 F
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 363 DTC Logic .............................................................. 380
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 363 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 380
Description ............................................................ 363 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 381 G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................ 363 DTC Logic .............................................................. 381
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 381 H
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ........................ 364
Description ............................................................ 364 U1263 USB ...................................................... 383
DTC Logic ............................................................. 364 DTC Logic .............................................................. 383
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 364 I
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 365 U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................ 384
Description ............................................................ 365 Description ............................................................. 384 J
DTC Logic ............................................................. 365 DTC Logic .............................................................. 384
Description ............................................................ 366 U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 386 K
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 367 U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 387 L
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 368 DTC Logic .............................................................. 387
DTC Logic ............................................................. 368 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 388 M
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 369 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 388
DTC Logic ............................................................. 369 AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 388 AV
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 370 DISPLAY UNIT ......................................................... 389
DTC Logic ............................................................. 370 DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .................. 389
O
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 371 A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ........................ 390
DTC Logic ............................................................. 371 A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis
Procedure .............................................................. 390
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 372 P
DTC Logic ............................................................. 372 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ............................................ 391
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 372 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 391
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 373 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 392
DTC Logic ............................................................. 373 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 373 dure ....................................................................... 392
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 374 REAR VIEW CAMERA ............................................ 393

REAR VIEW CAMERA : Diagnosis Procedure ......393 STEERING SWITCH ......................................... 422
Description ............................................................ 422
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT .............................394 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 422
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Pro-
cedure ....................................................................394 COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............. 424
MICROPHONE .........................................................395 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................................... 424
MICROPHONE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................395 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Description ............ 424
RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 397 dure ....................................................................... 424
Description .............................................................397
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................397 SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................... 427
RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............. 398 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ................................... 427
Description .............................................................398 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Description ............ 427
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................398 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Proce-
dure ....................................................................... 427
RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................. 399
Description .............................................................399 MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 429
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................399 Description ............................................................ 429
RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT .... 400
Description .............................................................400 ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 431
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................400
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 431
RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................ 401 Reference Value ................................................... 431
Description .............................................................401 DTC Index ............................................................. 437
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 439
HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIG- Reference Value ................................................... 439
NAL CIRCUIT .................................................. 402
Description .............................................................402 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ..................................... 442
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................402 Reference Value ................................................... 442
VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 445

CIRCUIT ........................................................... 404 Reference Value ................................................... 445
Description .............................................................404
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT ..................... 447
Reference Value ................................................... 447
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 406
Description .............................................................406
WIRING DIAGRAM ................................... 449
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................406 COLOR DISPLAY ............................................. 449
TWEETER ........................................................ 409 Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio system With-
Description .............................................................409 out Navigation System .......................................... 449
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................409 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 472
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 412 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................... 472
Description .............................................................412
Symptom Table ..................................................... 472
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 477
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................. 415 Description ............................................................ 477
Description .............................................................415
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................415 PRECAUTION ........................................... 479
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 418 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 479
Description .............................................................418 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................418 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 479
AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................. 421
Precaution for Work .............................................. 479
Description .............................................................421
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................421 PREPARATION ......................................... 480

PREPARATION ................................................ 480 REAR VIEW CAMERA .................................... 504
Special Service Tool ............................................. 480 Removal and Installation ....................................... 504 A
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 480 Adjustment ............................................................. 504
COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 481
B
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 481
Removal and Installation ....................................... 481 DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ...... 505
Work Flow .............................................................. 505 C
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................. 483
Removal and Installation ....................................... 483 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................ 507
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT .................................... 484 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING D
Removal and Installation ....................................... 484 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 507
USB CONNECTOR .......................................... 486 CONTROL UNIT : Description ............................... 507 E
Removal and Installation ....................................... 486 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
AUX IN JACK ................................................... 487 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 507
Removal and Installation ....................................... 487 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) ............... 507 F
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : De-
FRONT TWEETER ........................................... 488
scription ................................................................. 507
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Spe- G
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 489 cial Repair Requirement ........................................ 508
Removal and Installation ....................................... 489 CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Con-
figuration List ......................................................... 508 H
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 490
Removal and Installation ....................................... 490 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 510
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 491 AUDIO SYSTEM ............................................. 510 I
Removal and Installation ....................................... 491 System Diagram .................................................... 510
System Description ................................................ 510
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 492 Component Parts Location .................................... 512 J
Removal and Installation ....................................... 492 Component Description ......................................... 513
BOSE SPEAKER AMP .................................... 493 NAVIGATION SYSTEM .................................. 514
Removal and Installation ....................................... 493 System Diagram .................................................... 514 K
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................ 494 Component Parts Location .................................... 517
Removal and Installation ....................................... 494 Component Description ......................................... 518 L
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ....................... 495 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ................... 519
Removal and Installation ....................................... 495 System Diagram .................................................... 519
System Description ................................................ 519 M
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 496
Component Parts Location .................................... 520
Component Description ......................................... 521
AUDIO ANTENNA ............................................ 497 AV
Location of Antenna .............................................. 497
HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM .................... 522
System Diagram .................................................... 522
Window Antenna Repair ....................................... 497
Component Parts Location .................................... 523 O
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 500
Removal and Installation ....................................... 500 Component Description ......................................... 524
MICROPHONE ................................................. 501 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 525 P

Removal and Installation ....................................... 501 Description ............................................................. 525
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................ 525
TEL ANTENNA ................................................. 502 CONSULT Function (MULTI AV) ........................... 536
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 540
BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT ....................... 503
Removal and Installation ....................................... 503 U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ......................... 540
Description ............................................................. 540
DTC Logic ..............................................................540 U1227 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 559
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................540 DTC Logic ............................................................. 559
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ....................... 541
DTC Logic ............................................................. 560
U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 542
DTC Logic ............................................................. 561
U1201 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 543
DTC Logic ..............................................................543 U122A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 562
DTC Logic ............................................................. 562
DTC Logic ..............................................................544
U122E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 563
U1204 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 545 DTC Logic ............................................................. 563
DTC Logic ..............................................................545
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................545 U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR .............. 564
DTC Logic ............................................................. 564
DTC Logic ..............................................................546
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................546 U1243 DISPLAY UNIT ...................................... 565
DTC Logic ............................................................. 565
DTC Logic ..............................................................547
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................547 U1244 GPS ANTENNA .................................... 567
DTC Logic ............................................................. 567
DTC Logic ..............................................................548
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................548 U1263 USB ....................................................... 568
DTC Logic ............................................................. 568
DTC Logic ..............................................................549
U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT .............................. 569
U1217 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 550 Description ............................................................ 569
DTC Logic ..............................................................550
U1310 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 570
U1218 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 551 DTC Logic ............................................................. 570
DTC Logic ..............................................................551
U1219 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 552
DTC Logic ..............................................................552 AV CONTROL UNIT ................................................ 571
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure ......... 571
U121A AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 553
DTC Logic ..............................................................553 DISPLAY UNIT ........................................................ 572
U121B AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 554
DTC Logic ..............................................................554 A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY ........................ 573
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis
U121C AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 555 Procedure ............................................................. 573
DTC Logic ..............................................................555
BOSE SPEAKER AMP ........................................... 574
U121D AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 556 BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 574
DTC Logic ..............................................................556
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................556 REAR VIEW CAMERA ............................................ 575
REAR VIEW CAMERA : Diagnosis Procedure ..... 575
U121E AV CONTROL UNIT ............................ 557
MICROPHONE ........................................................ 576
DTC Logic ..............................................................557
U1225 AV CONTROL UNIT ............................. 558 RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ........ 578
Description ............................................................ 578
DTC Logic ..............................................................558

COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ......... 579 MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .................. 635
Description ............................................................ 579 Symptom Table ..................................................... 635 A
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 642
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 580 Description ............................................................. 642
B
Description ............................................................ 580
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 580 PRECAUTION ............................................ 649
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....................... 581 PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 649 C
Description ............................................................ 581 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 581 (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 649
MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................... 582 D
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis .......................... 649
Description ............................................................ 582 Precaution for Harness Repair .............................. 649
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 582 Precaution for Work ............................................... 650
E
AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................. 584 PREPARATION ......................................... 651
Description ............................................................ 584
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 584 PREPARATION ............................................... 651
Special Service Tool .............................................. 651 F
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER ............................... 585 Commercial Service Tools ..................................... 651
Description ............................................................ 585
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 585 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 652 G
TWEETER ........................................................ 588 AV CONTROL UNIT ........................................ 652
Description ............................................................ 588 Removal and Installation ....................................... 652
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 588 H
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH ............................ 654
CENTER SPEAKER ......................................... 591 Removal and Installation ....................................... 654
Description ............................................................ 591 I
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 591 AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT ................................... 655
REAR DOOR SPEAKER .................................. 594
Description ............................................................ 594 USB CONNECTOR ......................................... 657 J
SUBWOOFER .................................................. 597 AUX IN JACK .................................................. 658

K
Description ............................................................ 597 Removal and Installation ....................................... 658
FRONT TWEETER .......................................... 659
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 600 Removal and Installation ....................................... 659 L
Description ............................................................ 600
CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 660
M
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 602 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER .............................. 661
AV CONTROL UNIT ......................................... 602 Removal and Installation ....................................... 661
Reference Value ................................................... 602 AV
REAR DOOR SPEAKER ................................ 662
DTC Index ............................................................. 607
DISPLAY UNIT ................................................. 609 SUBWOOFER ................................................. 663 O
Reference Value ................................................... 609
BOSE SPEAKER AMP .................................... 611 BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 664
Reference Value ................................................... 611 P
WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 614 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA ...................... 665
COLOR DISPLAY ............................................ 614 Removal and Installation ....................................... 665
Wiring Diagram - With BOSE audio system With GPS ANTENNA ............................................... 666
Navigation System ................................................ 614 Removal and Installation ....................................... 666
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 635
STEERING SWITCH ........................................ 667 Removal and Installation ....................................... 671
MICROPHONE ................................................. 672
AUDIO ANTENNA ........................................... 668 Removal and Installation ....................................... 672
Location of Antenna ...............................................668
Window Antenna Repair ........................................668 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 673
ANTENNA AMP. .............................................. 671 Adjustment ............................................................ 673

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000009471157
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
ALNIA0182GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

< BASIC INSPECTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Has the symptom been repaired?
YES >> Inspection End.
NO >> GO TO 2.

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
AUDIO SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000009471158
B
G
AWNIA2690GB
System Description INFOID:0000000009471159 H
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components I
• Audio unit
• Display unit
• Bluetooth® control unit J
• Window antenna
• Steering wheel audio control switches
• Front door speakers
• Tweeters K
• Rear door speakers
• Subwoofer amp.
• Subwoofers L
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the window antenna. The audio unit then sends
audio signals to the front door speakers, tweeters, rear door speakers, subwoofer amp. and subwoofers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions.
M
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000009471160
ALNIA1160ZZ
1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Display unit M109 3. Tweeter RH M144

4. Audio unit M133, M147 5. Steering wheel audio control switches 6. Front door speaker
LH D3
RH D103
7. Rear door speaker 8. Subwoofers (view of underside of par- 9. Bluetooth® control unit B125, B126,
LH D209 cel shelf) B130
RH D309 LH B16
RH B17
10. Subwoofer amp. B21 11. Microphone R7

AUDIO SYSTEM
Component Description INFOID:0000000009471161
Part name Description

Audio unit Controls audio and AUX IN system functions. B
• Each audio operation can be operated.
Steering wheel audio control switches • Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to audio unit and Blue-
tooth® control unit. C
• Outputs audio signal from audio unit.
Front door speakers
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds.
• Outputs audio signal from audio unit. D
Tweeters
• Outputs high range sounds.
• Outputs audio signal from audio unit.
Rear door speakers
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds. E
• Receives signals from the audio unit.
Bluetooth® control unit • Outputs display signals.
• Receives and displays signals from the Bluetooth® control unit. F

Display unit
• Displays audio system information.
• Receives and amplifies sound signal from audio unit.
Subwoofer amp.
• Outputs amplified sound signal to the subwoofers. G
• Outputs audio signal from subwoofer amp.
Subwoofers
• Outputs low range sounds.
H
AV

HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
AWNIA2692GB
System Description INFOID:0000000009471163
Refer to the owner's manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
NOTE:
Cellular telephones must have their wireless connection set up (paired) before using the Bluetooth® telephone
system.
Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless con-
nection between their cellular telephone and the Bluetooth® control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone calls
can be sent and received. Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the Bluetooth® con-
trol unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth® control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired
with the Bluetooth® control unit. Different cellular telephones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to
the cellular telephone operating manual.
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT

When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the Bluetooth® control unit will power up. During power up,
the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec-
onds. If a phone is present in the vehicle and paired with the Bluetooth® control unit, Nissan Voice Recogni-
tion will then become active. Bluetooth® telephone functions can be turned off using the Nissan Voice
Recognition system.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCHES
When buttons on the steering wheel audio control switch are pushed, the resistance in steering wheel audio
control switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth® control unit uses this sig-
nal to perform various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system.
The following functions can be performed using the steering wheel audio control switch:
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system
• Start a voice recognition session
• Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume of calls
MICROPHONE
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the Bluetooth®
control unit. The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.
AUDIO UNIT
The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.

ALNIA1160ZZ
M
1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Display unit M109 3. Tweeter RH M144

4. Audio unit M133, M147 5. Steering wheel audio control switches 6. Front door speaker AV
LH D3
RH D103
7. Rear door speaker 8. Subwoofers (view of underside of par- 9. Bluetooth® control unit B125, B126,
LH D209 cel shelf)
O
B130
RH D309 LH B16
RH B17
10. Subwoofer amp. B21 11. Microphone R7 P

Audio unit • Receives telephone voice signal from Bluetooth® control unit.
• Sends telephone voice signals to the speakers.
Front door speaker
Receives telephone voice signals from the audio unit.
Tweeter
• Start a voice recognition session.
Steering wheel audio control switches • Answer and end telephone calls.
• Adjust the volume level.
Microphone Sends voice signals to Bluetooth® control unit.
• Controls hands-free phone functions.
Bluetooth® control unit • Receives display signals from audio unit.
• Outputs display signals to the display unit.
Display unit • Receives display signals from Bluetooth® control unit.

Bluetooth® antenna Sends telephone voice signal to Bluetooth® control unit.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AUDIO UNIT)
A
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000009471166
Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items. B

• Versions display
• Channel check diagnosis
• Key check diagnosis
• AV communication diagnosis C
VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
2. Turn the audio unit off.
3. While pressing “1” button, turn volume control dial clockwise or
counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. E
AWNIA2479GB
H
4. Diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.
NOTE:
Diagnosis default screen = All icons and segments of the audio display unit are turned on.
I
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the version display mode. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly
switches to each version display. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch when displaying each software
version returns to the diagnosis default screen.
J
Version display item
Mode Description
Software V###### Audio unit software version is displayed.
K
Hardware V###### Audio unit hardware version is displayed.
CD Mech V###### Audio unit CD mechanism version is displayed.
EEPROM V###### Audio unit EEPROM version is displayed. L
Versions display
Disp SW V###### Display unit software version is displayed.
Disp HW V###### Display unit hardware version is displayed.
M
Audio unit SDARS version is displayed.
SDARS V###### NOTE:
“VFFFFFF” is displayed when SDARS is not available.
AV
6. Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
CHANNEL CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON. O

3. While pressing the “1” button, turn the volume control dial clock-
wise or counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more.
AWNIA2479GB
4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial clockwise displays the channel check mode. Pressing and holding the
AUDIO switch during each channel check or waiting approximately 1 second after finishing all channel
checks returns to the diagnosis default screen.
Channel check item
Mode Description
Channel Check
Front Left
Channel Check
Front Right
Channel check Connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Channel Check
Rear Right
Channel Check
Rear Left
KEY CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
AWNIA2479GB

NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial counterclockwise displays the key check mode, and the pressed switch
name is shown. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch during the key check mode returns to the diagno-
sis default screen.

Key check item (audio unit)
Mode Display item Switch name A
1 Preset button “1” switch
B

5 Preset button “5” switch C
POWER ON-OFF switch
VOLUME up VOL up switch D
VOLUME down VOL down switch
AM·FM AM-FM switch
E
DISC DISC switch
Key check
AUX AUX switch
AUDIO AUDIO switch F
TUNE/FOLDER up TUNE/FOLDER up switch
TUNE/FOLDER down TUNE/FOLDER up switch
G
DISP CLOCK DISP CLOCK switch
SCAN SCAN switch
RPT/RDM RPT RDM switch H
SEEK/TRACK up SEEK CAT switch
SEEK/TRACK down TRACK switch
I
LOAD LOAD switch
EJECT EJECT switch
Key check item (steering switch) J

Mode Display item Switch name
STR SOURCE SOURCE switch
STR VOL UP VOL up switch K
STR VOL DOWN VOL down switch
Key check STR UP MENU up switch

L
STR DOWN MENU down switch
STR TEL END switch
STR TEL SEND

M
switch

AV COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AV
O
AWNIA2480GB

4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the AV communication diagnosis mode. Pressing the AUDIO
switch briefly again switches to each AV communication display.
AV communication diagnosis item
Display item
Description
AV communication item Current Past
The communication condition and error counter from the audio unit to
TRANSMIT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the audio display unit are displayed.
DISP OK / UN OK / 0 –39 The communication condition and error counter from the audio display
DISP MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39 unit to the audio unit.
BTHF MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the Bluetooth® control unit.
NO HISTORY BTHF — — This is displayed on models without Bluetooth®.
AV TROUBLE DEL — — The error record can be deleted.
6. Pressing the SEEK up switch displays the confirmation screen of “delete error record”. Press the SEEK
down switch if returning from RECORD DEL YES? to RECORD DEL NO?
The item is automatically determined approximately 6 seconds after it is displayed. Then the display
returns to AV TROUBLE DEL display item.
Display item Description

RECORD DEL–NO? Does not delete error record.
RECORD DEL–YES? Deletes error record.

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT)
A
The Bluetooth® control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically B
every ignition cycle during control unit initialization. The second diagnostic check is performed by the techni-
cian using the steering wheel audio control switches prior to trouble diagnosis.
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS C

• Internal control unit failure
• Bluetooth® antenna connection open or shorted
D
• Steering wheel audio control switches [ (PHONE/SEND), (PHONE/END)] stuck closed
• Vehicle speed pulse count
• Microphone connection test (with playback to operator)
• Bluetooth® inquiry check E
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON. F
2. Wait for the Bluetooth® system to complete initialization. This may take up to 10 seconds.
3. Press and hold the steering wheel audio control switch
(PHONE/SEND) button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth® G
system will begin to play a verbal prompt.
AWNIA2481ZZ
J
4. While the prompt is playing, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch (PHONE/END) button until you hear the
“Diagnostics mode” prompt. The Bluetooth® system will sound a K
5-second beep.
5. While the beep is sounding, press and hold the steering wheel
audio control switch (PHONE/END) button again until you
L
hear prompts.
6. The Bluetooth® system has now entered into the diagnostic
mode. Results of the diagnostic checks will be verbalized to the
technician. Refer to AV-25, "Work Flow". M
7. After the failure records are reported, an interactive microphone AWNIA2482ZZ
test will be performed. Follow the voice prompt. If the micro-

phone test fails, refer to AV-25, "Work Flow". AV
8. Self-diagnosis mode is complete when the voice prompt says “All diagnostic functions completed”.
Failure Message Action

“Internal failure” Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-88, "Removal and Installation". P
“Bluetooth® antenna open” 1. Inspect harness connection.

®
“Bluetooth antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-87, "Removal and Installation".

“Phone/Send for Hands Free System is stuck” Check steering wheel audio control switches. Refer to AV-81, "Removal and Instal-
“Phone/End for the Hands Free System is stuck” lation".
“Microphone test” (failed interactive test) 1. Inspect harness between Bluetooth® control unit and microphone.
2. Replace microphone. Refer to AV-86, "Removal and Installation" .

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO UNIT
B
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471169
C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-54, "Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio system".
D
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses are not blown.
E
Unit Terminals Signal name Fuse No.
19 Battery power 24
Audio unit F
7 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
H
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M133.
2. Check voltage between the audio unit connector M133 and
ground.
I
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery Battery J
19 Ground
voltage voltage voltage
M133
Battery Battery
7 Ground 0V
voltage voltage K
WKIA5769E
Are the voltage results as specified?

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. L
• Repair harness or connector.
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK M
Inspect audio unit case ground.
Does case ground pass inspection?
YES >> Inspection End. AV
NO >> Repair audio unit case ground.
SUBWOOFER AMP
O
SUBWOOFER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471170
P
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.


Subwoofer amp. 9 Ign switch ACC or ON 17
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect subwoofer amp connector.
3. Check voltage between subwoofer amp harness connector and ground.
(+)
(-) Voltage (approx.)
Connector Terminal
B21 9 Ground Battery voltage
Is battery voltage present?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between subwoofer amp and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between subwoofer amp harness connector and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
B21 7 Ground Yes
Does continuity exist?
NO >> Repair harness or connector.
DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471171
1.CHECK FUSES

9 Battery power 24
Display unit
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.

2. Disconnect display unit connector. A
3. Check voltage between the display unit and ground.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON B
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery Battery
9 Ground
voltage voltage voltage C
M109
Battery Battery
8 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
AWNIA1679ZZ
Are the voltage results as specified? D

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals.
• Repair harness or connector. E
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and F
ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity G

M109 3 Ground Yes
Is the inspection result normal? H
AWNIA1680ZZ
I
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471172
J
K
1.CHECK FUSE
L
Check that the following fuses of the Bluetooth® control unit are not blown.
Power source Fuse No.

M
Battery 24
Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
Ignition switch ON or START 3 AV
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. O
P

Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector
and ground.
(+) Ignition switch

(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal position
1 OFF
B126 2 Ground ACC Battery voltage
3 ON
Are the voltage results as specified? WKIA4389E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between Bluetooth® control unit and fuse.
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B126.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness con-
nector and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
B126 Ground Yes
23
AWNIA1681ZZ
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471173
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE)

Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.
(+) Ignition switch po-

Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal (-) sition
R7 4 Ground ON 5V
Is proper voltage present?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
WKIA5796E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY)

2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit and microphone connectors. A
3. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7
(A) terminal 4 and Bluetooth® control unit harness connector
B126 (B) terminal 29. B
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
R7 4 B126 29 Yes
4. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7 ALNIA0132ZZ
(A) terminal 4 and ground. D
A
— Continuity E
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground No
Are continuity results as specified? F
YES >> Replace the Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-88, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT G

2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit and microphone connectors. H
nector B126 (A) terminal 8 and microphone harness connector
R7 (B) terminal 2.
I
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
J
B126 8 R7 2 Yes
Is continuity present? AWNIA1693ZZ
YES >> Inspection End. K

AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Description INFOID:0000000009471174
The audio unit sends audio signals to the front door speakers using the front door speaker circuits.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471175
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Proper connection
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector.
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M133 (A) and suspect speaker
connector (B).
2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M133
(A) terminal and suspect speaker harness connector (B) termi-
nal.
A B
Continuity
2 1
D3
3 2
M133 Yes
11 1
D103
12 2
(A) terminal and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M133 Ground No AWNIA0031ZZ
11
12
Are continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.FRONT DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK
1. Connect audio unit connector and front speaker connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC.
3. Push POWER switch.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector termi-
nals with CONSULT or oscilloscope. A
(+) (-) Reference

Condition
Connector Terminal Terminal signal B
2 3
C
Receive
M133 audio sig-
11 12 nal
D
SKIA0177E
Is the inspection result normal? E

YES >> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-77, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-73, "Removal and
Installation". F
G
AWNIA0032ZZ
AV

TWEETER
TWEETER
The audio unit sends audio signals to the tweeters using the front door speaker circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M133 (A) and suspect tweeter
connector (B).
(A) and suspect tweeter harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
2 1
M143
3 2
M133 Yes
11 1
M144
12 2
(A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M133 Ground No
11 AWNIA0031ZZ
12
Are the continuity results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.TWEETER SIGNAL CHECK

TWEETER
1. Connect audio unit connector and tweeter connector.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC. A
nals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
B
(+) (-) Reference

Condition
Connector Terminal Terminal signal
C
2 3
Receive D
M133 audio sig-
11 12 nal
E
SKIA0177E
Is the audio signal voltage as specified?

YES >> Replace tweeter. Refer to AV-76, "Removal and Installa- F
tion".
Installation". G
AWNIA0032ZZ
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
The audio unit sends audio signals to the rear door speakers using the rear door speaker circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M133 (A) and suspect speaker
connector.
(A) and suspect speaker harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
4 1
D209
5 2
M133 Yes
13 1
D309
14 2
(A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M133 Ground No
13 AWNIA0033ZZ
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REAR DOOR SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect audio unit connector and rear door speaker connector.
B
(+) (-)
Reference
Connec- Terminal Condition
Terminal signal C
tor
4 5
D
Receive
M133 audio sig-
13 14 nal
E
SKIA0177E
Is the audio signal voltage as specified? F

YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-78, "Removal
and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-73, "Removal and G
Installation". AWNIA0034ZZ
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
The audio unit sends audio signals to the subwoofer amp. The subwoofer amp. amplifies the audio signals
before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, subwoofer amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect subwoofer amp. connector B21 and suspect sub-
woofer connector.
2. Check continuity between subwoofer amp. harness connector
B21 (A) and suspect subwoofer harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
6 1
B16
5 2
B21 Yes
10 1
B17
8 2
3. Check continuity between subwoofer harness connector B21 (A)
and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
6
5
B21 Ground No
10 AWNIA1682ZZ
8
Are the continuity test results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.REAR SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect subwoofer amp. connector B21 and suspect subwoofer
connector. A
4. Check the signal between subwoofer amp. harness connector
B
B21 terminals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition C
(+) (-) signal
6 5
D
Receive au-
B21
10 8 dio signal
E
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace suspect subwoofer. Refer to AV-79, "Removal
and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. G
AWNIA1683ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M133 and subwoofer speaker H
amp. connector B21.
(A) and subwoofer amp. harness connector B21 (B). I
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal J
4 2
5 1
M133 B21 Yes K
13 4
14 3
3. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M133 L
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
AV
5
M133 Ground No
13 AWNIA1684ZZ
14 O
Are continuity test results as specified?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose terminals. P
5.SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect audio unit connector M133 and subwoofer amp. con-
nector B21.
3. Push “POWER” switch.
4. Check the signal between audio unit harness connector M133
terminals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
4 5
Receive
M133 audio sig-
13 14 nal
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace subwoofer amp. Refer to AV-80, "Removal and
Installation".

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in steering switch circuit B
changes depending on which button is pushed.
D
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE

1. Disconnect steering switch connector M88. E
2. Check resistance between steering switch connector terminals.
Resistance F
Terminal Signal name Condition (Ω)
(Approx.)
Source Depress SOURCE switch. 0 G
Seek (up) Depress switch. 121
14
Seek (down) Depress switch. 321
AWNIA0035ZZ
H
17 Phone/Send Depress switch. 723
Volume (down) Depress volume DOWN switch. 0

I
15 Volume (up) Depress volume UP switch. 121
Phone/End Depress switch. 321
Do the steering switches check OK? J

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-81, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND BLUETOOTH® CON- K
TROL UNIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. L
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B126 and combination switch (spiral cable) connector M30.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B126 and combination switch (spiral
cable) harness connector M30. M
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Continuity

12 24 AV
B126 13 M30 31 Yes
14 33
O
®
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit connector B126 and ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity P

12
B126 13 Ground No
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness.
STEERING SWITCH
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND AUDIO UNIT
2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M147 and combination switch (spiral cable) har-
ness connector M30.

23 24
M147 24 M30 31 Yes
30 33
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M147 and ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity

23
M147 24 Ground No
30
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) CHECK
1. Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) har-
ness connector M30 (A) and M88 (B).
A B
Continuity
24 14
M30 31 M88 15 Yes
33 17
Does the combination switch (spiral cable) check OK? ALNIA0931GB
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND AUDIO UNIT
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B126 and audio unit harness con-
nector M133.

17 6
B126 18 M133 16 Yes
19 15
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B126 and ground.

17
B126 18 Ground No
19
YES >> GO TO 6.

STEERING SWITCH
6.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE A
1. Connect audio unit harness connector M133 and Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B126.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. B
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M133 terminals.
(+) (-) C
Voltage
Audio unit Audio unit
(Approx.)
6 D
M133 M133 15 3.3V
16
Are the continuity results as specified? E
YES >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-88, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-73, "Removal and Installation".
F
AV

MICROPHONE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Voice signals are transmitted from the microphone to the Bluetooth® control unit using the microphone signal
circuits.
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE

2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector and microphone
connector.
nector B126 (A) and microphone harness connector R7 (B).
A B
Continuity
7 1
WKIA5795E
B126 8 R7 2 Yes
29 4
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B126 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B126 8 Ground No
29
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MICROPHONE POWER SUPPLY
1. Connect Bluetooth® control unit connector and microphone con-
nector.
3. Check voltage between microphone harness connector R7 ter-
minal 4 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground 5V
Is voltage reading approx. 5 volts? WKIA5796E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-88, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK MICROPHONE SIGNAL

Check signal between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector
B126 terminals 7 and 8. A
(+) (-)
Connector Reference signal B
Terminal Terminal
While talking into microphone
B126 7 8 ALNIA0934GB
PKIB5037J
E
Are voltage readings as specified?
NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-86, "Removal and Installation". F
AV

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION

AUDIO UNIT
Reference Value INFOID:0000000009471186
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA1685ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Signal in- Condition
(Wire color)
Item put/out- Reference value (approx)
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
2 3 Audio sound Receive audio sig-

Output ON
(L) (B/W) signal front LH nal
SKIA0177E

Output ON
(LG) (B/Y) signal rear LH nal
SKIA0177E
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.
Depress switch. 0.7V

Steering
6 1.3V
Ground switch signal Input ON Depress switch.
(W/G)
A
Depress 2.0V
switch.
Except for above. 3.3V
7 Ignition switch
Ground ACC signal Input ON Battery voltage
(V/Y) ACC or ON
9 8
ILL signal Input ON Headlamps ON Battery voltage
(R/L) (R/Y)

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
(Wire color) A
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
B
Audio sound
11 12 Receive audio sig- C
signal front Output ON
(BR) (B/R) nal
RH
SKIA0177E D
E
Output ON
(O) (B/P) signal rear RH nal
F
SKIA0177E
15 Remote con-
– Input – – – G
(L/B) trol ground
Depress volume
0.7V
DOWN switch.
H
Steering Depress volume
16 1.3V
Ground switch signal Input ON UP switch.
(GR/L)
B Depress 2.0V I
switch.
19 J
Ground Battery power Input – – Battery voltage
(Y/R)
21 22 Multimedia
Input – –
(G) (R) CAN
K
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.
Depress switch. 0.7V L

23 1.3V
Ground Ladder out 1 Output ON Depress switch.
(W/B)
Depress 2.0V M
switch.
Depress volume AV
0.7V
DOWN switch.
Depress volume
24 1.3V
Ground Ladder out 2 Output ON UP switch. O
(GR/R)
Depress 2.0V
switch.
Except for above. 3.3V P
26 – Shield – – – –

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
(Wire color)
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
With Bluetooth®
27 28 Tel Voice sig- transmitting tel-
Input ON
(BR) (Y) nal voice signals to the
audio unit.
SKIB3609E
29
Ground Telephone ON Output ON – –
(G/O)
30
– Ladder shield – – – –
(LG/B)

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
Reference Values INFOID:0000000009471187
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
ALNIA1164ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description Condition
(Wire color) Reference value
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation G
Output switch
1
Ground M-CAN L — — — —
(G)
H
2
Ground M-CAN H — — — —
(R)
3
(B)
Ground Ground Input ACC — 0V I
8
Ground ACC power Input ACC — Battery voltage
(V/Y)
J
9
Ground Battery power Input OFF — Battery voltage
(Y/R)
10 11
Illumination Input — With parking lights ON Battery voltage K
(R/L) (R/Y)
AV

SUBWOOFER AMP
SUBWOOFER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA1163ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Signal Condition
(Wire color) Voltage
Item input/
Ignition (approx.)
+ – output Operation
switch
2 1
Audio signal LH Input ON Receive audio signal.
(LG) (O)
SKIB3609E
4 3
Audio signal RH Input ON Receive audio signal.
(L) (P)
SKIB3609E
6 5 Subwoofer audio signal

Output ON Receive audio signal.
(Y) (SB) LH
SKIB3609E
7
Ground Ground Input ON — —
(B)
9
Ground ACC power supply Input ACC — Battery voltage
(G)

(R) (BR) RH
SKIB3609E

A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
AWNIA1686ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal F
Signal Condition
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch G
1
(V)
2 H
Ground ACC power Input ACC/ON – Battery voltage
(GR)
3 ON/
Ground IGN power Input – Battery voltage
(O) START I
4
Ground Ground – – – 0.2V
(B)
7 J
8 Mic-in signal Input – – –
(L)
K
®
9 10 Bluetooth control
Audio out Output ACC/ON unit sends audio sig-
(BR) (Y)
nal L
SKIB3609E
11 M
– Mute Output – – –
(SB)
Press SOURCE
0V
switch. AV
Press SEEK UP
0.7 V
switch.
12
Ground Ladder input 1 Input ACC/ON Press SEEK DOWN O
(L) 1.3 V
switch.
Press switch. 2.0 V

P
Except for above. 3.3 V

Terminal
Signal Condition
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch
Press VOL DOWN
0.7 V
switch
13 Press VOL UP
Ground Ladder input 2 Input ACC/ON 1.3 V
(P) switch.
Pressing switch. 2.0 V

14
- Ladder ground Input - - -
(R)
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.

17 Steering switch 1.3V
Ground Output ON Depress switch.
(G) signal A
Depress 2.0V
switch.
Depress volume
0.7V
DOWN switch.
18 Steering switch Depress volume UP

Ground Output ON 1.3V
(W) signal B switch.

19 Steering switch
– Output – – –
(LG) ground
23
Gnd Ground – – – 0V
(B)
Vehicle speed When vehicle speed

28
– signal (8- Input ON is approx. 25 MPH
(BR)
pulse) (40 km/h)
PKIA1935E
29 Microphone
Ground Output ON – 5V
(R) power
33
– Antenna – – –
(B)
34
(B)
35
– M-CAN H1 – – –
(L)
36
– M-CAN L1 – – –
(P)
37 – Shield – – –
38 – Shield – – –

Terminal
Signal Condition
(Wire color) Reference value A
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch
40 B
– M-CAN H2 – – –
(G)
42
– M-CAN L2 – – –
(R) C
AV

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM
MONOCHROME DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio system INFOID:0000000009471190
ABNWA1937GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1512GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5112GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA1560GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5113GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5114GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA1563GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5286GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5287GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5115GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5116GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5117GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000009471191
AUDIO SYSTEM
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location

Malfunction in audio unit.
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit
Refer to AV-73, "Removal and Installation".
• Speaker circuit shorted to ground.
Refer to AV-54, "Wiring Diagram - With-
out BOSE Audio system".
No sound from all speakers. • Audio unit power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-27, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
• Poor connector connection of speaker.
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between
audio unit and speaker.
Refer to AV-32, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(front door speaker).
(tweeter).
No sound comes out or the level of the (rear door speaker).
sound is low. • Sound signal circuit malfunction between
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker subwoofer amp. and subwoofer.
LH, front door speaker RH, tweeter LH, Refer to AV-38, "Diagnosis Procedure"
tweeter RH, rear door speaker LH, rear (subwoofer).
door speaker RH, subwoofer LH, subwoof- • Malfunction in speaker.
er RH) does not output sound. Refer to AV-77, "Removal and Installa-
tion" (front door speaker).
Refer to AV-76, "Removal and Installa-
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (rear door speaker).
tion" (subwoofer).
• Malfunction in audio unit.
tion".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Noise comes out from all speakers.
Refer to AV-73, "Removal and Installation".
• Sound signal circuit malfunction between B
audio unit and speaker.
C
(tweeter).
(rear door speaker). D
subwoofer amp. and subwoofer.
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- Refer to AV-38, "Diagnosis Procedure"
er (front door speaker LH, front door speak- (subwoofer). E
er RH, tweeter LH, tweeter RH, rear door • Malfunction in speaker.
Noise is mixed with audio.
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, sub- • Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
woofer LH, subwoofer RH). lash and looseness).
Refer to AV-77, "Removal and Installa- F
tion" (tweeter).
Refer to AV-78, "Removal and Installa- G
tion" (subwoofer).
H
tion".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or I
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad antenna feeder.
roads) Refer to AV-82, "Location of Antenna".
• Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc- J
• Any radio station cannot be received or tion.
poor reception is caused even after mov- Refer to AV-46, "Reference Value".
No radio reception or poor reception.
ing to a service area with good reception • Poor connector connection of antenna or
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- antenna feeder. K
stacles generating external noises). Refer to AV-82, "Location of Antenna".
The majority of buzz/rattle sounds are not
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU-
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu- L
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi-
ally something nearby the speaker is caus-
or trim section.
ing the buzz/rattle.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE M

• Before performing diagnosis, confirm that the cellular phone being used by the customer is compatible with
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is
AV
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and
check that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the vehi-
cle or the cellular phone.
O
Check Compatibility
1. Make sure the customer’s Bluetooth® related concern is understood.
2. Verify the customer’s concern. P
NOTE:
The customer’s phone may be required, depending upon their concern.
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with
one provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”.

AUDIO SYSTEM
a. Using the website’s search engine, find out if the customer’s phone is on the approved list.
b. If the customer’s phone is NOT on the approved list:
Stop diagnosis here. The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth® phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “N” (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as “Y” (compatible) in the “Basic Features”.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as “Y” (compatible):
Perform diagnosis as per the following table.

Does not recognize cellular phone connec-
tion (no connection is displayed on the dis- Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
play at the guide).
• Hands-free phone operation can be
®
made, but the communication cannot be • Malfunction in Bluetooth control unit.
®
Replace Bluetooth control unit. Refer to
established.
Hands-free phone cannot be established. • Hands-free phone operation can be per- AV-88, "Removal and Installation".
formed, however, voice between each • Malfunction in audio unit. Replace audio
other cannot be heard during the conver- unit. Refer to AV-73, "Removal and In-
sation. stallation".
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by Check the “microphone speaker” in Inspec-
hands-free phone. tion & Adjustment Mode if sound is heard.
Originating sound is not heard by the other Sound operation function is normal.
party with hands-free phone communica- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
tion. Sound operation function does not work.
Refer to AV-44, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• The voice recognition can be controlled.
• Steering switch’s volume DOWN and vol- Steering switch malfunction.
Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-81,
ume UP switch works, but does "Removal and Installation".
not work.
The system cannot be operated.
Steering switch’s , volume DOWN Steering switch signal circuit malfunction.
and volume UP switches do not work. Refer to AV-41, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch ground circuit malfunction.

All steering switches do not work.

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
The majority of the audio concerns are the result of outside causes (bad CD, electromagnetic interference, B
etc.).
NOISE
The following noise results from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or C
external noise from trains and other sources. It is not a malfunction.
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to moun-
tains or buildings blocking the signal.
D
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from the waves sent directly from the broadcast station arriving at the
antenna at a different time from the waves which reflect off mountains or buildings.
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise, if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment are malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and opera- E
tion of each piece of electrical equipment, and determine the cause.
NOTE:
The source of the noise can be found easily by listening to the noise while removing the fuses of electrical
F
components, one by one.
Type of Noise and Possible Cause
G
Occurrence condition Possible cause
A continuous growling noise occurs. The speed of
Occurs only when engine is ON. • Ignition components
the noise varies with changes in the engine speed.
H
The occurrence of the noise is linked with the operation of the fuel pump. • Fuel pump condenser
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches. I
electrical components are oper-
ating. The noise occurs when various motors are operat- • Motor case ground
ing. • Motor
• Rear defogger coil malfunction J
The noise occurs constantly, not just under certain conditions. • Open circuit in printed heater
• Poor ground of antenna feeder line
• Ground wire of body parts
A cracking or snapping sound occurs while the vehicle is being driven, especially when K
• Ground due to improper part installation
it is vibrating excessively.
• Wiring connections or a short circuit
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE L
Symptom Cause and Counter measure
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones may not be recognized M

Does not recognize cellular phone connection (No connection is by the in-vehicle phone module.
displayed on the display at the guide). Refer to “RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE (Check Compati-
bility)” in AV-66, "Symptom Table".
AV
Customer will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is outside of the telephone service area.
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio O
waves; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage,
near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Cannot use hands-free phone. • The cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
NOTE: P
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wire-
less connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System cannot charge cellular phones.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too
The other party’s voice cannot be heard by hands-free phone. loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a
call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or
Poor sound quality. far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection disruption.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000010135040
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SR and SB section of this Service Man-
ual.
WARNING: E
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
F
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the SR section.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this G
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS H
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the Igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a I
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the Ignition OFF, disconnect the J
battery and wait at least three minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Work INFOID:0000000009471194
K
• When removing or disassembling each component, be careful not to damage or deform it. If a component
may be subject to interference, be sure to protect it with a shop cloth.
• When removing (disengaging) components with a screwdriver or similar tool, be sure to wrap the component
L
with a shop cloth or vinyl tape to protect it.
• Protect the removed parts with a shop cloth and prevent them from being dropped.
• Replace a deformed or damaged clip.
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one. M
• Be sure to tighten bolts and nuts securely to the specified torque.
• After installation is complete, be sure to check that each part works properly.
• Follow the steps below to clean components:
AV
- Water soluble dirt:
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the dirty area.
• Then rub with a soft, dry cloth.
- Oily dirt: O
• Dip a soft cloth into lukewarm water with mild detergent (concentration: within 2 to 3%) and wipe the dirty
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off. P
- Do not use organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline.
- For genuine leather seats, use a genuine leather seat cleaner.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool INFOID:0000000009471195
The actual shape of the tools may differ from those illustrated here.
Tool number Description
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
— Removing trim components
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000009471196
Tool name Description

Power tool Loosening nuts, screws and bolts
PIIB1407E

AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A

AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000009471197
B
Base Audio
C
K
ALNIA1147ZZ
1. Audio unit brackets (LH/RH) 2. A/C auto amp. 3. Cluster lid C lower
4. Audio unit Clip Pawl L
REMOVAL M
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-67, "Removal and Installation (Battery)".
2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
AV
3. Remove cluster lid C lower finisher (1).
• : Pawl
• : Clip
O
ALNIA1152ZZ

AUDIO UNIT
4. Remove the audio unit screws (A) and cluster lid C screws (B).
ALNIA1130ZZ
5. Pull out the audio unit, disconnect the harness connector from the audio unit and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
A
Monochrome Display B
ALNIA1148ZZ
G
1. Audio display unit 2. Audio & A/C display unit bracket 3. A/C display unit
4. Front cover
REMOVAL H
I
3. Remove the audio & A/C display unit bracket screws (A).
4. Pull out the audio & A/C display unit assembly (1), disconnect
the harness connectors from the audio display unit and remove.
J
L
ALNIA1145ZZ
5. Remove the front cover, then disconnect the audio display unit connectors and remove the audio display
unit from the audio/A/C display unit brackets. M
INSTALLATION
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the front tweeter speaker grille. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the front tweeter speaker screws (A).
4. Pull out front tweeter speaker (1), disconnect the harness con-
nector from the front tweeter speaker and remove.
AWNIA2220ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-18, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the front door speaker screws (A).
C
3. Disconnect the harness connector from the front door speaker
(1) and remove.
4. Remove the front door speaker spacer screws (B) and remove
the front door speaker spacer (2). D
I
ALNIA1133ZZ
INSTALLATION J
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to INT-21, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the rear door speaker screws (A).
3. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the rear door
speaker (1) and remove.
ALNIA1135ZZ
INSTALLATION

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
ALNIA1134ZZ
G
1. Subwoofer (LH) 2. Subwoofer (RH) A. Subwoofer screws
B. Subwoofer connectors
REMOVAL H
1. Remove the rear parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the subwoofer screws.
I
3. Pull out the subwoofer, disconnect the harness connector from the subwoofer and remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. J
AV

SUBWOOFER AMP
SUBWOOFER AMP
ALNIA1136ZZ
1. Subwoofer amp. and bracket A. Subwoofer amp. bracket screws
REMOVAL
2. Remove the parcel shelf finisher. Refer to INT-28, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
The subwoofer amp. can be removed without removing the parcel amp finisher. If moving the subwoofer
amp. and bracket, it is necessary to remove the parcel shelf finisher.
3. Remove the trunk upper finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Exploded View".
4. Remove the subwoofer amp. screws.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the subwoofer amp. and remove.
INSTALLATION

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the driver airbag module. Refer to SR-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the steering wheel audio control switch screws (A).
C
3. Release the steering wheel audio control switch harness clips
(B).
4. Remove the steering wheel audio control switches (1).
D
ALNIA1132ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
Location of Antenna INFOID:0000000009471205
ALNIA1213ZZ
1. Audio unit 2. Audio unit antenna feeder 3. In-line connectors M103, M501
4. Antenna amp. 5. Window antenna
Window Antenna Repair INFOID:0000000009471206
ELEMENT CHECK
1. Attach probe circuit tester (ohm setting) to antenna terminal on
each side.
SEL250I
• When measuring continuity, wrap tin foil around the top of

probe. Then, press the foil against the wire with your finger.
SEL122R

AUDIO ANTENNA
2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist.
A
G
SEL252I
3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication

will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point. H
SEL253I
K
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Conductive silver composition (DuPont No. 4817 or equivalent)
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long L
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth M
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a AV
cloth dampened in alcohol.
2. Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
NOTE: O
Shake silver composition container before use.
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing P
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
PIIA0215E

AUDIO ANTENNA
4. After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for conti-
nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
5. Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area

for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum dis-
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
SEL013D

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the rear pillar finisher RH. Refer to INT-23, "Exploded View".
2. Detach the antenna amp. harness clip (A).
C
3. Disconnect the harness connectors (B) from the antenna amp.
(1).
4. Remove the antenna amp. screw (C) and the antenna amp. (1).
D
ALNIA0043ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front room/map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-84, "Removal and Installation".
2. Detach the microphone connector (A).
ALNIA0928ZZ
3. Remove the front room/map lamp covers (1), then remove the
map lamp assembly cover (2).
ALNIA0929ZZ
4. Release the microphone tabs (A), then remove the microphone

(1).
ALNIA0930ZZ
INSTALLATION

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL B
C
3. Remove the Bluetooth antenna screw (A).
4. Detach the Bluetooth antenna harness clip (B).
5. Fold down the rear seat (if equipped) or open the trunk lid, then
D
detach the Bluetooth antenna harness clip (C).
6. Disconnect the harness connector (D) from the Bluetooth
antenna (1) and remove.
E
ALNIA1144ZZ
INSTALLATION J
AV

BLUETOOTH CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL
4. From inside the passenger compartment, remove the Bluetooth control unit bracket screws.
5. From inside the trunk, disconnect the Bluetooth control unit con-
nectors (B) and remove the Bluetooth control unit and bracket
assembly.
6. Remove the Bluetooth control unit bracket screws (A) to remove
the Bluetooth control unit from the Bluetooth control unit brack-
ets.
ALNIA1151ZZ
INSTALLATION

< BASIC INSPECTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
ALNIA0182GB M
DETAILED FLOW
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM AV
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the
incident/malfunction occurred).
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM P
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. Verify relation between the symptom and the condition
when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.

< BASIC INSPECTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
4.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure.
>> GO TO 5.
5.FINAL CHECK
Refer to confirmed symptom in step 2, and make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Has the symptom been repaired?
NO >> GO TO 2.

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
AUDIO SYSTEM
B
K
AWNIA3225GB
L
AUDIO SYSTEM
The audio system consists of the following components
• Audio unit M
• Display unit
• Bluetooth® control unit
• Window antenna AV
• BOSE speaker amp.
• Tweeters O
• Center speaker
• Rear subwoofers P
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the window antenna. The audio unit then sends
audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The Bose speaker amp. sends the audio signals to the front door
speakers, tweeters, center speaker, rear door speakers and rear subwoofers.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control
level can be selected by the customer. Refer to Owner's Manual for operating instructions.

AUDIO SYSTEM
AWNIA3222ZZ
1. Tweeter LH M51 2. Center speaker M130 3. Display unit M109

4. Tweeter RH M52 5. Audio unit M132, M135 6. Steering wheel audio control switches
7. Front door speaker 8. Rear door speaker 9. Rear subwoofer
LH D3 LH D202 LH B106
RH D103 RH D302 RH B107
10. Bluetooth® control unit 11. BOSE speaker amp. B109, B110 12. Microphone R7
B125, B130, B131

Audio unit Controls audio system and AUX IN system functions
• Receives display signals from the audio unit.
Bluetooth® control unit • Outputs display signals to the display unit.

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Display unit • Receives display signals from the Bluetooth® control unit.
Receives power (amp ON) and audio signals from audio unit, and outputs au-
BOSE speaker amp.
dio signals to each speaker.
B
• Each audio operation can be operated

Steering wheel audio control switches • Steering switch signal (operation signal) is output to audio unit and Blue-
tooth® control unit C
• Outputs audio signal from BOSE speaker amp.
Front door speakers
• Outputs high, mid and low range sounds
D
Center speaker
Tweeters E
• Outputs high range sounds
Rear door speakers
• Outputs audio signal from BOSE speaker amp. F
Rear subwoofers
• Outputs low range sounds
AV

AWNIA2695GB
Refer to the Owner's Manual for Bluetooth® telephone system operating instructions.
NOTE:
system.

the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec-
onds. If a phone is present in the vehicle and paired with the Bluetooth® control unit, Nissan Voice Recognition
will then become active. Bluetooth® telephone functions can be turned off using the Nissan Voice Recognition
system.
control switch circuit changes, depending on which button is pushed. The Bluetooth® control unit uses this sig-
MICROPHONE
AUDIO UNIT
The audio unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.

AWNIA3222ZZ
M
1. Tweeter LH M51 2. Center speaker M130 3. Display unit M109

4. Tweeter RH M52 5. Audio unit M132, M135 6. Steering wheel audio control switches AV
7. Front door speaker 8. Rear door speaker 9. Rear subwoofer
LH D3 LH D202 LH B106
RH D103 RH D302 RH B107
O
10. Bluetooth® control unit 11. BOSE speaker amp. B109, B110 12. Microphone R7
B125, B130, B131

Audio unit • Receives telephone voice signal from Bluetooth® control unit.
• Sends telephone voice and voice guidance signals to BOSE speaker amp.
Inputs power (amp ON) and sound signal from audio unit, and outputs sound
BOSE speaker amp.
signal to each speaker.
Door speaker
Receives telephone voice and voice guidance signals from BOSE speaker
Front tweeter
amp.
Center speaker
Steering wheel audio control switches • Answer and end telephone calls
• Adjust the volume level
Display unit • Receives display signal from Bluetooth® control unit.

Microphone Sends voice signals to Bluetooth® control unit.
Bluetooth® control unit Controls hands-free phone functions.

®
Bluetooth antenna Sends telephone voice signal to Bluetooth® control unit.

A
Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items. B

• Versions display
• Channel check diagnosis
• Key check diagnosis
• AV communication diagnosis C
VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION

1. Turn ignition switch ON. D
3. While pressing “1” button, turn volume control dial clockwise or
counterclockwise for 30 clicks or more. E
AWNIA2479GB
H
4. Diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.
NOTE:
I
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the version display mode. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly
switches to each version display. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch when displaying each software
version returns to the diagnosis default screen.
J
Version display item
Mode Description
Software V###### Audio unit software version is displayed.
K
Hardware V###### Audio unit hardware version is displayed.
CD Mech V###### Audio unit CD mechanism version is displayed.
EEPROM V###### Audio unit EEPROM version is displayed. L
Versions display
Disp SW V###### Display unit software version is displayed.
Disp HW V###### Display unit hardware version is displayed.
M
Audio unit SDARS version is displayed.
SDARS V###### NOTE:
“VFFFFFF” is displayed when SDARS is not available.
AV
CHANNEL CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1. Turn ignition switch ON. O

AWNIA2479GB

NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial clockwise displays the channel check mode. Pressing and holding the
AUDIO switch during each channel check or waiting approximately 1 second after finishing all channel
checks returns to the diagnosis default screen.
Channel check item
Mode Description
Channel Check
Front Left
Channel Check
Front Right
Channel check Connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
Channel Check
Rear Right
Channel Check
Rear Left
KEY CHECK DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
AWNIA2479GB

NOTE:
5. Turning the TUNE/FOLDER dial counterclockwise displays the key check mode, and the pressed switch
name is shown. Pressing and holding the AUDIO switch during the key check mode returns to the diagno-
sis default screen.

Key check item (audio unit)
Mode Display item Switch name A
B

5 Preset button “5” switch C
POWER ON-OFF switch
VOLUME up VOL up switch D
VOLUME down VOL down switch
AM·FM AM-FM switch
E
DISC DISC switch
Key check
AUX AUX switch
AUDIO AUDIO switch F
TUNE/FOLDER up TUNE/FOLDER up switch
TUNE/FOLDER down TUNE/FOLDER up switch
G
DISP CLOCK DISP CLOCK switch
SCAN SCAN switch
RPT/RDM RPT RDM switch H
SEEK/TRACK up SEEK CAT switch
SEEK/TRACK down TRACK switch
I
LOAD LOAD switch
EJECT EJECT switch
Key check item (steering switch) J

Mode Display item Switch name
STR SOURCE SOURCE switch
STR VOL UP VOL up switch K
STR VOL DOWN VOL down switch
Key check STR UP MENU up switch

L
STR DOWN MENU down switch
STR TEL END switch
STR TEL SEND

M
switch

AV COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AV
O
AWNIA2480GB

4. Returns to diagnosis default screen and displays “AV DIAGNOSIS”.
5. Pressing the AUDIO switch briefly displays the AV communication diagnosis mode. Pressing the AUDIO
switch briefly again switches to each AV communication display.
AV communication diagnosis item
Display item
Description
AV communication item Current Past
TRANSMIT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the audio display unit are displayed.
DISP OK / UN OK / 0 –39 The communication condition and error counter from the audio display
DISP MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39 unit to the audio unit.
BTHF MPDT OK / UN OK / 0 –39
the Bluetooth® control unit.
NO HISTORY BTHF — — This is displayed on models without Bluetooth®.
AV TROUBLE DEL. — — The error record can be deleted.
6. Pressing the SEEK up switch displays the confirmation screen of “delete error record”. Press the SEEK
down switch if returning from RECORD DEL YES? to RECORD DEL NO?
The item is automatically determined approximately 6 seconds after it is displayed. Then the display
returns to AV TROUBLE DEL display item.
Display item Description

RECORD DEL–NO? Does not delete error record.
RECORD DEL–YES? Deletes error record.

A

D
OPERATION PROCEDURE
AWNIA2481ZZ
J
5-second beep.
L
hear prompts.

O
“Internal failure” Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-177, "Removal and Installation".
P
“Bluetooth® antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-176, "Removal and Installation".
“Phone/Send for Hands Free System is stuck” Check steering wheel audio control switches. Refer to AV-170, "Removal and In-
“Phone/End for the Hands Free System is stuck” stallation".

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO UNIT
AUDIO UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471223
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-138, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio System".
1.CHECK FUSES

19 Battery power 24
Audio unit
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Check voltage between the audio unit connector M132 and
ground.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
19 Ground
M132
Battery Battery
7 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
WKIA5769E

YES >> GO TO 3.
Inspect audio unit case ground.
Does case ground pass inspection?
NO >> Repair audio unit case ground.
DISPLAY UNIT
1.CHECK FUSES

Unit Terminals Signal name Fuse No. A

9 Battery power 24
Display unit
B
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. C
2. Disconnect display unit connector. D
3. Check voltage between the display unit and ground.
(+) E
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
9 Ground
voltage voltage voltage F
M109
Battery Battery
8 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
AWNIA1679ZZ
Are the voltage results as specified? G

YES >> GO TO 3.
• Repair harness or connector. H
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Check continuity between display unit harness connector and
ground.
J
M109 3 Ground Yes
Is the inspection result normal? K
AWNIA1680ZZ L
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471225
M
AV
1.CHECK FUSE
O
Check for blown fuses.

P
10 25
BOSE speaker amp. Battery power
11 26
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.


2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp connector.
3. Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp harness connector
and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
10
B110 Ground Battery voltage
11
Is battery voltage present? AWNIA1689ZZ
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between BOSE speaker amp and fuse.
Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp harness connector
and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B110 Ground Yes
12
NO >> Repair harness or connector. AWNIA1690ZZ

1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 24
Ignition switch ON or START 3
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.

and ground. A
(+) Ignition switch

(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal position B
1 OFF
C
3 ON
Are the voltage results as specified? WKIA4389E
YES >> GO TO 3. D
NO >> Check harness between Bluetooth® control unit and fuse.
E
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B131.
F
nector and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity G
Connector Terminal
4
B131 Ground Yes
23 H
AWNIA1681ZZ
NO >> Repair harness or connector. I
MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471228 J
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-138, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio System". K
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE) L

Check voltage between microphone harness connector and ground.
(+) Ignition switch po- M

Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal (-) sition
R7 4 Ground ON 5V
Is proper voltage present? AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
O
WKIA5796E

P

2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit and microphone connectors.
B131 (B) terminal 29.
A B
Continuity
R7 4 B131 29 Yes
4. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7 ALNIA0132ZZ
(A) terminal 4 and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground No
YES >> Replace the Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-177, "Removal and Installation".
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit and microphone connectors.
nector B131 (A) terminal 8 and microphone harness connector
R7 (B) terminal 2.
A B
Continuity
B131 8 R7 2 Yes
Is continuity present? AWNIA1693ZZ


FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio B
signals before sending them to the front door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following: E
• Damage
• Disconnected or loose terminals F
YES >> GO TO 2
NO >> Repair the terminal and connector. G
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect
speaker connector. H
2. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connec-
tor B109 (A) and suspect speaker harness connector (B).
I
A B Continuity
J
18 1
D3
19 2
B109 Yes
31 1 K
D103
32 2
tor B109 (A) and ground. L
A
B Continuity M
Connector Terminal
18
19 AV
B109 Ground No
31 AWNIA1694ZZ
32
Are continuity test results as specified? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
• Repair harness or connector. P

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and suspect
speaker connector.
4. Check the signal between BOSE speaker amp. harness connec-
tor B109 terminals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
Connec- Terminal Reference

Condition
tor (+) (-) signal
18 19
Receive
B109 audio sig-
31 32 nal
SKIA0177E
Is audio signal voltage as specified?

YES >> Replace suspect speaker. Refer to AV-166, "Removal
and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. AWNIA1695ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M132 and BOSE speaker amp.
connector B109.
(A) and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 (B).
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M132 B109 Yes
11 33
12 34
(A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M132 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12
YES >> GO TO 5.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect audio unit connector and BOSE speaker amp. connec-
tor. A
2. Turn ignition switch ACC.
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
2 3
D
Receive
M132 audio sig-
11 12 nal E
SKIA0177E
Are the audio signal voltage readings as specified? F

YES >> Replace BOSE speaker amp. Refer to AV-169,
"Removal and Installation".
Installation". ALNIA0171ZZ
AV

TWEETER
TWEETER
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the tweeters using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
tweeter connector.
tor B110 (A) and suspect tweeter harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
1 1
M51
2 2
B110 Yes
4 1
M52
3 2
tor B110 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
B110 Ground No
4 AWNIA1697ZZ
3
YES >> GO TO 3.

TWEETER
tweeter connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
1 2
D
Receive
B110 audio sig-
4 3 nal E
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace suspect tweeter. Refer to AV-164, "Removal
and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. G
AWNIA1698ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect audio unit connector M132 and BOSE speaker amp. H
connector B109.
(A) and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 (B). I
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M132 B109 Yes K
11 33
12 34
(A) and ground.
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
AV
3
M132 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

TWEETER
tor.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
2 3
Receive
M132 audio sig-
11 12 nal
SKIA0177E
Are the audio signal voltage readings as specified?


CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
signals before sending them to the center speaker using the audio signal circuits.
D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following: E
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center
speaker connector M130. H
tor B109 (A) and center speaker harness connector M130 (B).
I
A B
Continuity
J
29 1
B109 M130 Yes
30 2
AWNIA1699ZZ
K
A L
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
29
B109 Ground No M
30
YES >> GO TO 3. AV
3.CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK O

CENTER SPEAKER
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center
speaker connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
AWNIA1700ZZ
Receive
B109 29 30 audio sig-
nal
SKIA0177E
Is the audio signal voltage reading as specified?

YES >> Replace center speaker. Refer to AV-165, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.HARNESS CHECK
connector B109.
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M132 B109 Yes
11 33
12 34
(A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M132 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CENTER SPEAKER SIGNAL CHECK

CENTER SPEAKER
tor. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
2 3
D
Receive
M132 audio sig-
11 12 nal E
SKIA0177E

AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
The audio unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio
signals before sending them to the rear door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B109, B110 and
suspect speaker connector.
tors B109 (A) and B110 (B) and suspect speaker harness con-
nector (C).

15 2
A: B109 C: D202
28 1
Yes
9 2
B: B110 C: D302
14 1
tors B109 (A) and B110 (B) and ground.
Connector Terminal - Continuity

15
A: B109
28
Ground No
9
B: B110
14
AWNIA1702ZZ

YES >> GO TO 3.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connectors and suspect speaker
connector. A
B
tors B109 (A) and B110 (B) terminals with CONSULT or oscillo-
scope.
C
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
A: B109 28 15 D
Receive
audio sig- E
B: B110 14 9 nal
SKIA0177E
F
Are audio signal voltage readings as specified?
and Installation". G
4.HARNESS CHECK
H
connector B109.
(A) and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 (B). I
A B
Continuity J
4 24
5 23
M132 B109 Yes K
13 26
14 25
(A) and ground.
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
AV
5
M132 Ground No
13 AWNIA1704ZZ
14 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect audio unit connector M132 and BOSE speaker amp.
connector B109.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
4 5
Receive
M132 audio sig-
13 14 nal
SKIA0177E


SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the audio unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following: E
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
rear subwoofer connector. H
tor B110 (A) and suspect rear subwoofer harness connector (B).
I
A B
Continuity
J
13 1
B106
8 2
B110 Yes
5 1 K
B107
6 2
tor B110 (A) and ground. L
A
— Continuity M
Connector Terminal
13
8 AV
B110 Ground No
5 AWNIA1705ZZ
6
Are the continuity test results as specified? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
• Repair harness or connector. P

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect rear
subwoofer connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
13 8
Receive au-
B110
5 6 dio signal
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace suspect rear subwoofer. Refer to AV-168,
NO >> GO TO 4.
AWNIA1706ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
connector B109.
A B
Continuity
4 24
5 23
M132 B109 Yes
13 26
14 25
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M132 Ground No
13 AWNIA1704ZZ
14
YES >> GO TO 5.

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect audio unit connector M132 and BOSE speaker amp.
connector B109. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
4 5
D
Receive
M132 audio sig-
13 14 nal E
SKIA0177E

AV

AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
When the audio system is turned on, a voltage signal is supplied from the audio unit to the BOSE speaker
amp. When this signal is received, the BOSE speaker amp. will turn on.
1.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP)

1. Turn audio system ON.
2. Check voltage between BOSE speaker amp. harness connector
B109 terminal 20 and ground.
(+)
(-) Voltage (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
Is inspection result normal?
NO >> GO TO 2.
AWNIA1707ZZ
2.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (AUDIO UNIT)

Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M132 terminal
1 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M132 1 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> Repair harness or connector.

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in the steering wheel audio B
control switch circuit changes, depending on which button is pushed.
D

1. Disconnect steering switch connector M88. E
Resistance F
(Approx.)
Volume (down) Depress volume DOWN switch. 0 G

AWNIA0035ZZ
H
Source Depress SOURCE switch. 0
17
14 I
Phone/Send Depress switch. 723
Do the steering switches check OK? J

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND BLUETOOTH® CON- K
TROL UNIT
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector B131 and combination switch (spiral cable) connector M30.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B131 and combination switch (spiral
cable) harness connector M30. M

12 24 AV
B131 13 M30 31 Yes
14 33
O
®
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit connector B131 and ground.
Connector Terminal — Continuity P

12
B131 13 Ground No
14
YES >> GO TO 3.
STEERING SWITCH
3.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND AUDIO UNIT
2. Check continuity between audio unit harness connector M135 and combination switch (spiral cable) har-
ness connector M30.

23 24
M135 24 M30 31 Yes
30 33
3. Check continuity between audio unit connector M135 and ground.

23
M135 24 Ground No
30
YES >> GO TO 4.
A B
Continuity
24 14
M30 31 M88 15 Yes
33 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND AUDIO UNIT
2. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B131 and audio unit harness con-
nector M132.

17 6
B131 18 M132 16 Yes
19 15
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit connector B131 and ground.

17
B131 18 Ground No
19
YES >> GO TO 6.

STEERING SWITCH
6.CHECK AUDIO UNIT VOLTAGE A
1. Connect audio unit harness connector M132 and Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B131.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. B
3. Check voltage between audio unit harness connector M132 terminals.
(+) (-) C
Voltage
Audio unit Audio unit
(Approx.)
6 D
M132 M132 15 3.3V
16
Are the continuity results as specified? E
NO >> Replace audio unit. Refer to AV-161, "Removal and Installation".
F
AV

circuits.

connector.
A B
Continuity
7 1
WKIA5795E
B131 8 R7 2 Yes
29 4
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B131 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B131 8 Ground No
29
YES >> GO TO 2.
nector.
minal 4 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.

(+) (-)
Terminal Terminal
PKIB5037J
E
AV

AUDIO UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]

AUDIO UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3223ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
(Wire color)
Item put/out- Reference value (Approx.)
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
1
Ground Amp ON Output ON — Battery voltage
(B/P)
2 3 Audio signal Receive audio sig-

Output ON
(W) (B) front LH nal
SKIA0177E
4 5 Audio signal Receive audio sig-

Output ON
(W/R) (B/R) rear LH nal
SKIA0177E
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.

Steering
6 1.3V
Ground switch signal Input ON Depress switch.
(W/G)
A
Depress 2.0V
switch.
7 Ignition switch
Ground ACC power Input ON Battery voltage
(V/Y) ACC or ON
9 8
ILL signal Input ON Parking lamps ON Battery voltage
(R/L) (R/Y)

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
(Wire color) A
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
B
11 12 Audio signal Receive audio sig- C

Output ON
(LG) (V) front RH nal
SKIA0177E D
E
Output ON
(V) (P) signal rear RH nal
F
SKIA0177E
15 Steering
– – – – – G
(L/B) switch ground
Depress volume
0.7V
DOWN switch.
H
16 1.3V
Ground switch signal Input ON UP switch.
(GR/L)
B Depress 2.0V I
switch.
When vehicle
18
Ground Speed signal Input ON speed is approx 40 K
(V/W)
km/hr (25 mph)
SKIA6649J
L
19
(Y/R)
21 22 Multimedia M
Input – –
(G) (R) CAN
Depress volume
0.7V
DOWN switch.
AV
23 1.3V
Ground switch signal Output ON UP switch.
(W/b)
A Depress O
2.0V
switch.
P

AUDIO UNIT
Terminal
(Wire color)
put Ignition
+ – Operation
switch
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.

Steering
24 1.3V
Ground switch signal Output ON Depress switch.
(GR/R)
B
Depress 2.0V
switch.
26 – Shield – – – –
With Bluetooth®
27 28 Tel Voice sig- transmitting tel-
Input ON
(BR) (Y) nal voice signals to the
audio unit.
SKIB3609E
29
Ground Telephone ON Output ON – –
(G/O)
30
– Shield – – – –
(LG/B)

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
ALNIA1164ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description Condition
Input/ Ignition (Approx.)
+ – Signal name Operation G
Output switch
1
Ground M-CAN L — — — —
(G)
H
2
Ground M-CAN H — — — —
(R)
3
(B)
Ground Ground Input ACC — 0V I
8
Ground ACC power Input ACC — Battery voltage
(V/Y)
J
9
Ground Battery power Input OFF — Battery voltage
(Y/R)
10 11
Illumination Input — With parking lights ON Battery voltage K
(R/L) (R/Y)
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA1165ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 2 Sound signal front tweeter
Output switch Sound output.
(LG) (V) LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 3 Sound signal front tweeter
(G) (W) RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
5 6 Sound signal rear subwoof-
(R) (BR) er RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
Ground Ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON
Ignition
10
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 8 Sound signal rear subwoof- C
(L) (P) er LH
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
14 9 Sound signal rear door
(LG) (O) speaker RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
18 19 Sound signal front door
(W) (B) speaker LH
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition
20
Ground Amp. ON signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(SB)
ACC
J
Ignition
24 23 K
Sound signal rear LH Input switch Sound output.
(GR) (L)
ON
L
SKIB3609E
M
Ignition
26 25
Sound signal rear RH Input switch Sound output.
(BR) (Y)
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 15 Sound signal rear door
Output switch Sound output. P
(G) (L) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
29 30 Sound signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
31 32 Sound signal front door
(R) (BR) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
33 34
Sound signal front RH Input switch Sound output.
(LG) (V)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
35 36
Sound signal front LH Input switch Sound output.
(W) (B)
ON
SKIB3609E

A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
AWNIA1686ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal F
Signal Condition
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch G
1
(V)
2 H
Ground ACC power Input ACC/ON – Battery voltage
(GR)
3 ON/
(O) START I
4
Ground Ground – – – 0.2V
(B)
7 J
8 Mic-in signal Input – – –
(L)
K
®
9 10 Bluetooth control
Audio out Output ACC/ON unit sends audio sig-
(BR) (Y)
nal L
SKIB3609E
11 M
– Mute Output – – –
(SB)
Press VOL DOWN
0.7 V
switch AV
12 Press VOL UP
Ground Ladder input 1 Input ACC/ON 1.3 V
(L) switch.
Pressing switch. 2.0 V O


Terminal
Signal Condition
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch
Press SOURCE
0V
switch.
Press SEEK UP
0.7 V
switch.
13
Ground Ladder input 2 Input ACC/ON Press SEEK DOWN
(P) 1.3 V
switch.
Press switch. 2.0 V

14
- Ladder ground Input - - -
(R)
Depress SOURCE
0V
switch.

17 Steering switch
Ground Output ON
(G) signal A Depress switch. 1.3V

Depress volume
0.7V
DOWN switch.
18 Steering switch Depress volume UP

Ground Output ON 1.3V
(W) signal B switch.

19 Steering switch
– Output – – –
(LG) ground
23
Gnd Ground – – – 0V
(B)
Vehicle speed When vehicle speed

28
– signal (8- Input ON is approx. 25 MPH
(BR)
pulse) (40 km/h)
PKIA1935E
29 Microphone
Ground Output ON – 5V
(R) power
33
(B)
34
(B)
35
– M-CAN H1 – – –
(L)
36
– M-CAN L1 – – –
(P)
37 – Shield – – –
38 – Shield – – –

Terminal
Signal Condition
Item input/
Ignition (Approx.)
switch
40 B
– M-CAN H2 – – –
(G)
42
– M-CAN L2 – – –
(R) C
AV

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM
MONOCHROME DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio System INFOID:0000000009471254
ABNWA1939GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1940GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNWA0517GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5126GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5127GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5128GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5170GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5129GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5191GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5130GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5131GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5132GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5133GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5134GB

MONOCHROME DISPLAY
ABNIA5135GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
AUDIO SYSTEM
B
AUDIO SYSTEM
C
The disk cannot be removed. Audio unit Refer to AV-161, "Removal and Installa-
D
tion".
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
Refer to AV-138, "Wiring Diagram - With
BOSE Audio System".
• Audio unit power supply and ground cir-
cuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-102, "AUDIO UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
No sound from all speakers.
• BOSE speaker amp. power supply and
ground circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-103, "BOSE SPEAKER AMP
: Diagnosis Procedure".
• BOSE speaker amp. ON signal circuits
malfunction.
audio unit and BOSE speaker amp.
(tweeter).
(center speaker).
(rear door speaker).
(subwoofer).
No sound comes out or the level of the • Sound signal circuit malfunction between
sound is low. BOSE speaker amp. and speaker
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker (tweeter).
tweeter RH, center speaker, rear door (center speaker).
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure"
subwoofer LH, rear subwoofer RH) does (rear door speaker).
not output sound. Refer to AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(subwoofer).
• Malfunction in speaker.
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (center speaker).
tion" (subwoofer).
tion".
• Malfunction in BOSE speaker amp.
tion".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
• Malfunction in audio unit
tion".
• Malfunction in BOSE speaker amp. B
tion"
C
audio unit and BOSE speaker amp.
(front door speaker). D
(tweeter).
(center speaker). E
(subwoofer). F
BOSE speaker amp. and speaker
(front door speaker). G
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- (tweeter).
Noise is mixed with audio. er (front door speaker LH, front door speak- Refer to AV-113, "Diagnosis Procedure"
H
er RH, tweeter LH, tweeter RH, center (center speaker).
speaker, rear door speaker LH, rear door Refer to AV-116, "Diagnosis Procedure"
speaker RH, rear subwoofer LH, rear sub- (rear door speaker).
woofer RH). Refer to AV-119, "Diagnosis Procedure" I
(subwoofer).
tion" (front door speaker). J
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (center speaker). K
tion" (subwoofer). L
tion".
M
tion".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or AV
• Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc- O
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- antenna feeder. P
indicative of an issue with the speaker, usu-
or trim section.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE

AUDIO SYSTEM
the vehicle.
Check Compatibility
2. Verify the customer’s concern.
NOTE:
NOTE:
any further action.

play at the guide).
®
®
established. Replace Bluetooth control unit. Refer to
formed, however, voice between each • Malfunction in audio unit. Replace audio
other cannot be heard during the conver- unit. Refer to AV-161, "Removal and In-
sation. stallation".
not work.


A
etc.).
NOISE
D
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise, if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment are malfunctioning.
NOTE:
F
G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op-
Noise only occurs when various • Relay malfunction, audio unit malfunction
eration of various switches. I
ing. • Motor

AV
lowing conditions:
NOTE: P

call.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
ual.
WARNING: E
F
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
K
L
AV
- Oily dirt: O
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

AUDIO UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [MONOCHROME DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]

AUDIO UNIT
B
Bose Audio
C
K
ALNIA1147ZZ
1. Audio unit brackets (LH/RH) 2. A/C auto amp. 3. Cluster lid C lower
4. Audio unit Clip Pawl L
REMOVAL M
2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation".
AV
3. Remove the cluster lid C lower finisher (1).
• : Pawl
• : Clip
O
ALNIA1152ZZ

AUDIO UNIT
4. Remove the audio unit screws (A) and the cluster lid C screws
(B).
ALNIA1130ZZ
5. Pull out the audio unit, disconnect the connectors and remove the audio unit.
INSTALLATION

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
A
Monochrome Display B
ALNIA1148ZZ
G
1. Audio display unit 2. Audio & A/C display unit bracket 3. A/C display unit
4. Front cover
REMOVAL H
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-68, "Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)".
I
3. Remove the audio & A/C display unit bracket screws (A).
4. Pull out the audio & A/C display unit assembly (1), disconnect
the harness connectors from the audio display unit and remove.
J
L
ALNIA1145ZZ
5. Remove the front cover, then disconnect the audio display unit connectors and remove the audio display
unit from the audio/A/C display unit brackets. M
INSTALLATION
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front pillar finisher. Refer to INT-24, "Removal and Installation".
AWNIA2220ZZ
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the center speaker grille, using a suitable tool.
2. Remove the center speaker screws (A).
C
3. Pull out the center speaker (1), disconnect the harness connec-
tor from the center speaker and remove.
AWNIA2221ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
(1) and remove.
the front door speaker spacer (2).
ALNIA1133ZZ
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
ALNIA1135ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
ALNIA1134ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
A
G
ALNIA1137ZZ
1. Bose speaker amp. A. Bose speaker amp. screws

H
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If removing the BOSE speaker amp. bracket, it is necessary to remove the parcel shelf finisher. The BOSE I
speaker amp. can be removed without removing the BOSE speaker amp. bracket.
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the trunk upper finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Exploded View". J
3. Remove the Bose speaker amp. screws.
4. Disconnect the Bose speaker amp. connectors and remove the Bose speaker amp.
INSTALLATION K
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL
(B).
ALNIA1132ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
A
ALNIA1181ZZ
I
1. Audio unit 2. Audio unit antenna feeder 3. In-line connectors M103, M501
4. Antenna amp. 5. Window antenna 6. Satellite radio tuner
7. Satellite radio antenna feeder 8. Satellite radio antenna J
K
ELEMENT CHECK
each side. L
AV
SEL250I
O
P
SEL122R

AUDIO ANTENNA
SEL252I

will change abruptly when probe passes the broken point.
SEL253I
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
drawing pen.
NOTE:
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
PIIA0215E

AUDIO ANTENNA
nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver A
B
SEL012D
D
tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and E
hot air outlet.
hours.
F
G
SEL013D
AV

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
REMOVAL
(1).
ALNIA0043ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
C
ALNIA0928ZZ
F
G
I
ALNIA0929ZZ
4. Release the microphone tabs (A), then remove the microphone J

(1).
ALNIA0930ZZ M
INSTALLATION
AV

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
REMOVAL
ALNIA1144ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
C
4. From inside the passenger compartment, remove the bracket screws and lower the assembly for access.
5. Remove the Bluetooth control unit screws (A).
D
6. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the Bluetooth control
unit and remove.
E
ALNIA1154ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. H
AV

< BASIC INSPECTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION
OVERALL SEQUENCE
AWNIA2486GB
• Reference 1··· Refer to AV-202, "CONSULT Function (MULTI AV)".

• Reference 2··· Refer to AV-304, "Symptom Table".
DETAILED FLOW
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items.
• Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunc-
tion occurred).
• Check the symptom.
>> GO TO 2
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS (CONSULT)
1. Connect CONSULT and perform “SELF-DIAGNOSIS” for “MULTI AV”.
NOTE:
Skip to step 4 of the diagnosis procedure if “MULTI AV” is not displayed.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results.
Is any DTC No. displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3 A
NO >> GO TO 4
3.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS (CONSULT)
B
1. Check the DTC No. indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the DTC No. list. Refer to AV-272, "DTC Index".
NOTE:
Start with the diagnosis for the CAN communication system if “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] or CONTROL C
UNIT (CAN) [U1010]” is displayed.
>> GO TO 5 D
4.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS BY SYMPTOM

Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-304, "Symptom E
Table".
>> GO TO 5 F
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
NOTE: G
Erase the stored self-diagnosis results after repairing or replacing the relevant components if any DTC No. has
been indicated in the self-diagnosis results.
H
>> GO TO 6
6.CHECK AFTER REPAIR I
1. Perform self-diagnosis for “MULTI AV” with CONSULT after repairing or replacing the malfunctioning
parts.
2. Check if any DTC No. is displayed in the self-diagnosis results. J
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 7 K
7.FINAL CHECK
Perform the operation check to confirm that the malfunction symptom is solved or that any other symptoms
are present. L
Are any symptoms present?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Inspection End. M
AV

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
REAR VIEW MONITOR POSSIBLE ROUTE LINE CENTER POSITION ADJUST-
MENT
MENT : Description INFOID:0000000010064810
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
MENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000010064811
1.STEERING OPERATION
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost positions.
>> GO TO 2
2.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
>> END
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000010064812
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000010064813
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

-CONSULT Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save current vehicle specification. Refer to AV-181, "CONFIGURA-
TION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-181, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Special Repair Require- A
ment".
>> GO TO 4. B
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course
C
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END D

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT)
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000010064814
E
• Since vehicle specifications are not included in the AV control unit after replacement, it is required to write
vehicle specifications with CONSULT.
• Configuration has three functions as follows. F
Function Description
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit. G
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. H
CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000010064815
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION I
CONSULT Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of AV control unit. J
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3. K
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-CONFIG FILE”
L
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file”.
>> WORK END

M
3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION-MANUAL SELECTION”
Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit. AV
For data to write, refer to AV-181, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List".
>> GO TO 4. O
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course P
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Configuration List INFOID:0000000010064816
CAUTION:

Check vehicle specifications before servicing.
MANUAL SETTING ITEM

Note
Items Setting value
LHD —
STEERING
RHD —
MODE 1 BASE
GRADE
MODE 2 OTHER
NORMAL —
ENGINE TYPE
HYBRID —
NORMAL NORMAL
BODY TYPE
CONV CONVERTIBLE
NONE/AVM NONE or AVM
CAMERA SYSTEM REAR REAR CAMERA
REAR + SIDE REAR + SIDE CAMERA
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH —
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
ROD TYPE —
ANTENNA TYPE
LONG TYPE —
WITHOUT —
DUAL-ZONE AUTO TEMP
WITH —
WITHOUT —
DVD PLAY FUNCTION
WITH —
SED 2DR SEDAN 2 DOOR
SED 4DR 1 SEDAN 4 DOOR
SED 4DR 2 SEDAN 4 DOOR (WIDE)
H/B 2DR H/B 2 DOOR
H/B 4DR H/B 4 DOOR
COUPE 2DR COUPE 2 DOOR
COUPE T COUPE T BAR
WGN 4DR 2 49H WAGON 4 DOOR (WIDE)
H/T 2DR 1 H/T 2 DOOR
H/T 2DR 2 H/T 2 DOOR (HIGHROOF)
BODY TYPE
H/T 4DR 2 H/T 4 DOOR (WIDE)
WGN 2DR WAGON 2 DOOR
WGN 4DR 1 WAGON 4 DOOR
WGN 4DR 3 WAGON 4 DOOR (HIGHROOF)
VAN 2DR VAN 2 DOOR
VAN 4DR 1 VAN 4 DOOR
VAN 4DR 2 VAN 4 DOOR (HIGHROOF)
CONV CONVERTIBLE

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
AUDIO SYSTEM
B
AV
AWNIA3229GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
• AV control unit
• Display unit
• Window antenna
• A/C and AV switch assembly
• Tweeters
• Subwoofers
When the audio system is on, radio signals are received by the window antenna. The AV control unit then
sends audio signals to the front door speakers, tweeters, rear door speakers, subwoofer amp. and subwoof-
ers.
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM
The satellite radio system consists of the following components
• Satellite antenna
• Satellite radio tuner
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the satellite radio tuner from the satellite
antenna. The satellite radio tuner then sends audio signals to the AV control unit.
Refer to Owner's Manual for satellite radio system operating instructions.

AUDIO SYSTEM
AV
P
AWNIA3227ZZ

AUDIO SYSTEM
1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Tweeter RH M144 3. AV control unit M115, M116, M117,

M118, M119, M120, M121 (located
behind A/C and AV switch assembly)
4. Display unit M141 5. A/C and AV switch assembly M98 6. Steering angle sensor M53 [located
in steering column behind combina-
tion switch (spiral cable)]
7. Steering wheel audio control switch- 8. USB interface M211 (view in center 9. Aux jack M209
es console)
10. Subwoofer (view under rear parcel 11. Satellite radio tuner B111 12. Bluetooth® control unit B125, B130,
shelf) B131
LH B16
RH B17
13. Subwoofer amp. B21 14. Microphone R7 15. Rear view camera T101
16. Front door speaker 17. Rear door speaker
LH D3 LH D202
RH D103 RH D302

Controls audio system, USB connection, AUX IN connection and satellite ra-
AV control unit
dio system functions
Display unit Displays all audio and climate control related information
• Audio operation can be operated
Steering wheel audio control switches
• Steering switch signal is output to AV control unit
• Outputs audio signal from AV control unit
Front door speakers
Tweeters
Rear door speakers
• Receives and amplifies sound signal from AV control unit
Subwoofer amp.
• Outputs amplified sound signal to the subwoofers.
• Outputs audio signal from subwoofer amp.
Subwoofers
• Receives radio signals from satellite antenna
Satellite radio tuner
• Sends audio signals to AV control unit
Satellite antenna Audio signal (satellite radio) is received and output to AV control unit.

REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
A
D
AWNIA1957GB

E
When the shift selector is in the R position, the display shows a view to the rear of the vehicle. Lines which
indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed. F
AV

AWNIA3227ZZ

1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Tweeter RH M144 3. AV control unit M115, M116, M117, A

M118, M119, M120, M121 (located
in steering column behind combina- B
es console) C
shelf) B131
LH B16
RH B17 D
LH D3 LH D202 E
RH D103 RH D302

F

• Sends camera ON signal to the rear view camera G
AV control unit • Receives camera image signal from the rear view camera
• Sends image signal to the display unit
• Receives camera ON signal from the AV control unit H
Rear view camera
• Sends image signal to the AV control unit
Steering angle sensor Sends steering angle information to the AV control unit via CAN communication
I
AV

AWNIA3232GB
NOTE:
system.

the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec-
Recognition system.
MICROPHONE
AV CONTROL UNIT
The AV control unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the speakers.

AV
P
AWNIA3227ZZ

1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Tweeter RH M144 3. AV control unit M115, M116, M117,

M118, M119, M120, M121 (located
in steering column behind combina-
es console)
shelf) B131
LH B16
RH B17
LH D3 LH D202
RH D103 RH D302
AV control unit • Receives telephone voice signal from Bluetooth® control unit
• Sends telephone voice and voice guidance signals to the speakers
Front door speaker
Receives telephone voice and voice guidance signals from the AV control unit
Front tweeter
Microphone Sends voice signals to Bluetooth® control unit
Bluetooth® control unit Controls hands-free phone functions
Bluetooth® antenna Sends telephone voice signal to Bluetooth® control unit

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT)
A
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B

The ON/OFF operation (continuity) of each switch in the multifunction switch and preset switch can be
checked.
Self-Diagnosis Mode C
• Press the BACK switch and the switch of the 8-direction
switches within 10 seconds after turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the D
buzzer sounds, all indicators of the preset switch illuminate, and
the self-diagnosis mode starts.
• The continuity of each switch at the ON position can be checked
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. E
NOTE:
The disk eject switch cannot be checked.
F
JSNIA1072GB
Finishing Self-diagnosis Mode

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF. G
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit H
performs a diagnosis for each unit in the system during the on board diagnosis.
• Perform a CONSULT diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., if the screen does not display
anything, the multifunction switch does not function, etc.
I
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and J
a confirmation/adjustment mode for operating manually.
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display. K
• The confirmation/adjustment mode allows the technician to check, modify or adjust the vehicle signals and
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically). L
On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Description M
• AV control unit diagnosis
Self-Diagnosis
• Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.
AV

Mode Description
The confirmation of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and shad-
Display Diagnosis
ing of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Diagnosis of signals can be performed for vehicle speed, parking brake,
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
Speaker Test The connection of a speaker can be confirmed by test tone.
System malfunctions and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Error History (Detailed) displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust-
ed.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis The transmitting/receiving of CAN communication can be monitored.
The communication condition of each unit of MULTI AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the audio system OFF.
3. While pressing the SETTING button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When the
self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
• Shifting from current screen to previous screen is performed
by pressing the BACK button.
JSNIA1073GB
4. The trouble diagnosis initial screen is displayed, and then the

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected.
AWNIA1735GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self-diagnosis”.
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch
operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot start up if any
malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between
AV control unit and multifunction switch.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
JSNIA0139GB

2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com- A

pleted. The unit names and the connection lines are color-coded
according to the diagnostic results.
Con- B
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green C
Connection malfunction Gray Yellow
Unit malfunction Note Red Green AWNIA1973GB
D
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV con- E
trol unit internal error.
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > gray. F
- The comments of the self-diagnosis results can be viewed with a
component in the diagnosis result screen.
I
AWNIA1960GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts. J
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot
be started up if any malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multi-
K
function switch.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart
L
Possible malfunction location / Action
Diagnosis results Detection logic
to take
AV
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting no
O
unit power supply and ground circuits. malfunction in those components, re-
place AV control unit.
AWNIA1974GB
P
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in
unit display), connection malfunctions with other
connection unit may be displayed.
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
malfunction”

to take
When either one of the following items

are detected:
• serial communication circuits be-
tween AV control unit and front dis- Serial communication circuits between
play unit are malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
• serial communication signal between
AV control unit and front display unit
is malfunctioning.
AWNIA1975GB
When any one of the following items is

detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply
and ground circuits are malfunction-
• Satellite radio tuner power supply
ing.
and ground circuits.
• Serial communication circuits be-
tween AV control unit and satellite ra-
dio tuner are malfunctioning.
dio tuner.
• serial communication or request sig-
• Request signal circuit between AV
nal between AV control unit and sat-
control unit and satellite radio tuner.
ellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV
AWNIA2291GB
control unit and satellite radio tuner is
malfunctioning.
detected:
• Bluetooth® control unit power supply
• AV communication circuits between
ing.
• AV communication circuits between camera control unit and Bluetooth®
control unit.
camera control unit and Bluetooth®
control unit are malfunctioning.
multifunction switch and camera con-
trol unit. (without DVD player mod-
els)
trol unit are malfunctioning. (without
DVD player models)
DVD player and camera control unit.
(with DVD player models)
DVD player and camera control unit
are malfunctioning. (with DVD player
AWNIA1977GB
models) multifunction switch and Bluetooth®
• AV communication signal between control unit. (without rear view cam-
era)
AV control unit and Bluetooth® con-
trol unit is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
The number of units that are displayed on the on board self-diagnosis display according to equipment.
CONFIRMATION/ADJUSTMENT MODE
1. Start the diagnosis function and select “Confirmation/Adjustment”. The confirmation/adjustment mode
indicates where each item can be checked or adjusted.

2. Select each switch on the “Confirmation/Adjustment Mode”
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press A
the RETURN switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
B
AWNIA1965GB
D
Display Diagnosis
I
AWNIA1966GB
J
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB image signal error is detected.
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint

K
G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals L
A comparison check can be made of each actual vehicle signal and
the signals recognized by the system.
M
AV
O
AWNIA1744GB
P
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status Remarks
Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed ON
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
ON Parking brake is applied.
Parking brake
OFF Parking brake is released.

ON Light switch ON
Lights —
OFF Light switch OFF
ON Ignition switch ON
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in the ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R” po-
ON
sition
Reverse Changes in indication may be delayed. This is normal.
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than the “R” position
Speaker Test
Select “SPEAKER DIAGNOSIS” to display the Speaker Diagnosis
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker.
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
Tweeter : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control
On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT is supported.
Refer to AV-202, "CONSULT Function (MULTI AV)".
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
selected until the self-diagnosis results are displayed.
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
ON and then no error has occurred until the self-diagnosis start. Check the “Error Record” to detect any error
that may have occurred before the self-diagnosis start because of this situation.
Count up method A
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored. The counter can be reset (no error
record display) with the “Delete log” switch or CONSULT.
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
Display type of occur-

Error history display item
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
Count up method B Other than the above

JSNIA0151GB
Error Item F
Some error items may be displayed simultaneously according to the cause. If some error items are displayed
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.
G
Error item Description Possible malfunction factor/Action to take
Perform diagnosis with CONSULT, and
then repair the malfunctioning parts accord-
CAN communication malfunction is detect- H
CAN COMM CIRCUIT ing to the diagnosis results.
ed.
Refer to AV-202, "CONSULT Function
(MULTI AV)".
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect- I
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
AV communication circuit initial diagnosis
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace the AV control unit.
malfunction is detected. J
FLASH-ROM Error Of Control Unit
AV control unit malfunction is detected.
CAN Controller Memory Error
K
When any one of the following items is de-
tected:
• front display unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Front display unit power supply and L
• serial communication circuits between ground circuits.
Front Display Connection Error
AV control unit and front display unit are • Serial communication circuits between
malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
• serial communication signal between AV M
control unit and front display unit is mal-
functioning.
AV

tected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning.
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
• serial communication circuits between
ground circuits.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner
• Serial communication circuits between
SAT Connection Error are malfunctioning.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
between AV control unit and satellite ra-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
dio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV control
unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunc-
tioning.
tected:
• multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
• AV communication signal between AV
control unit and multifunction switch is
malfunctioning.
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Connection Confirmation” and “Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera” are available.
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION
The vehicle speed sensor, parking brake, park lights, ignition switch
and reverse sensor can be inspected.
AWNIA1744GB
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status

When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection
ON
mode is stopped when it is turned ON).
Steer. Angle Sensor • Ignition switch at ACC.
OFF
• No steering with ignition switch ON.
— Malfunction detected in camera connection recognition signal.
ON Selector lever is in “R” with ignition switch ON.
• Ignition switch at ACC.
Reverse Sensor OFF
• Selector lever is in position other than “R” with ignition switch ON.
— Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal.
ON Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON.
Vehicle Speed Sensor OFF
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON.
Side view Switch — Not used.
ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA

Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear-
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor cam- A
era.
JSNIA0085GB
D
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis
• CAN communication status and error counter is displayed.
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It E
increases by 1 if the status is normal at the next ignition switch ON
cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if reset. F
Malfunction counter
Items Display (Current)
(Past)
G
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AWNIA1967GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39 H
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
I
Rx (STRG) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas- J
ter unit) and each unit.
detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It K
increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• If it resets, the error counter is erased.
L
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
M
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39 AWNIA1978GB
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(BTHF-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39 AV
Delete Unit Connection Log
Deletes any unit connection records and error records from the AV
control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been O
removed.)
JSNIA0154GB
Initialize Settings

“Erase All Customer Data” and “Reset Factory Configuration” are
possible.
CAUTION:
• Never perform Reset Factory Configuration except when con-
figuration is unsuccessful.
• Factory Configuration Initialize requires configuration. For
details, refer to AV-193, "Diagnosis Description".
AWNIA2038GB
CONSULT Function (MULTI AV) INFOID:0000000010064830
APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT performs the following functions via the communication with the AV control unit.
Diagnosis mode Description

Ecu Identification The part number of AV control unit can be checked.
Performs a diagnosis on the AV control unit and a connection diagnosis for the communication
Self Diagnostic Result
circuit of the Multi AV system, and displays the current and past malfunctions collectively.
Data Monitor The diagnosis of vehicle signal that is input to the AV control unit can be performed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing AV control unit.
AV Communication
When “AV communication” of “CAN Diag Support Monitor” is selected, the following function will be performed.
Displays the communication status from AV control unit to each unit as well as the error
AV&NAVI C/U
AV communication counter.
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
The part number of AV control unit is displayed.
SELF DIAGNOSIS RESULT
• In CONSULT self-diagnosis, self-diagnosis results and error history are displayed collectively.
• The current malfunction indicates “CRNT”. The past malfunction indicates “PAST”.
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
The counter increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch ON cycle.
Self-diagnosis Results Display Item

CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts ac-
CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]
ed. cording to the diagnosis results.
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect-
CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [U1010]
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310]
malfunction is detected.
Cont Unit [U1200] Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
tion occurs constantly.
CAN CONT [U1216]
SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV control unit malfunction is detected.
iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229]
Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E]
Revision: August 2013 A V - 2 0 2 2014 Maxima NAM

A
HDD CONN [U1218]
• If the hard disk drive (HDD) is function-
HDD READ [U1219]
ing normally, there is a possibility of a
HDD WRITE [U121A] AV control unit malfunction is detected. temporary malfunction. B
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
HDD COMM [U121B]
function occurs constantly.
HDD ACCESS [U121C]
Check that the connection to the USB con- C
USB CONTROLLER [U1225] USB connection malfunction is detected.
nector is normal.
DSP CONN [U121D] • If a disc can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a tempo- D
AV control unit malfunction is detected. rary malfunction.
DSP COMM [U121E] • Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
E
• If DVD can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a tempo-
DVD COMM [U1227] AV control unit malfunction is detected. rary malfunction.
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal- F
The writing of configuration data is incom-
CONFIG UNFINISH [U122A] Write configuration data with CONSULT.
plete.
G
Predictive course line center position ad-
Adjust the predictive course line center po-
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [U1232] justment of the steering angle sensor is in-
sition of the steering angle sensor.
complete.
H
When either one of the following items are
detected: • Display unit power supply and ground
• Display unit power supply and ground circuits.
FRONT DISP CONN [U1243]
circuits malfunction is detected. • Communication circuits between AV I
• Communication circuits between AV control unit and AV display unit.
control unit and display unit.
Satellite radio tuner malfunction is detect- Replace the satellite radio tuner if the mal- J
SAT CONN [U1255]
ed. function occurs constantly.
Detection of over current in USB connect- Check USB harness between the AV con-
USB OVERCURRENT [U1263]
er. trol unit and USB connector.
K
detected:
• Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits. L
• SWITCH CONN [U1240] • AV communication circuits between AV
• AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch.
control unit and multifunction switch are
malfunctioning.
M
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit. AV
• For each signal, actual signal can be compared with the condition recognized on the system.
O
Display Item Display Vehicle status Remarks
On Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH)
VHCL SPD SIG P
Off Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
On Parking brake is applied. normal.
PKB SIG
Off Parking brake is released.

Block the light beam from the auto
On light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor
Off to light when the light SW is OFF or —
ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off Ignition switch in ACC position
On Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
REV SIG Selector lever in any position other
Off normal.
than R
SELECTION FROM MENU

Allows the technician to select which vehicle signals should be displayed and displays the status of the
selected vehicle signals.
Item to be selected Description

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
ILLUM SIG The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” is selected.
IGN SIG
REV SIG
WORK SUPPORT
Conditions Description
Steering angle sensor neutral position adjustment can be per-
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT formed. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : Description".
CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit.
READ CONFIGURATION
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.

A

D
OPERATION PROCEDURE
AWNIA1979ZZ
J
5-second beep.
L
hear prompts.

O
P
“Bluetooth® antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-332, "Removal and Installation".

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped on a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010064834
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON-

DTC Diagnostic item is detected when ... Probable malfunction location
SULT
When AV control unit is not transmitting or re-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ceiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec- CAN communication system.
onds or more.
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “AV Control Unit”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO >> Refer to GI section. Refer to GI-41, "Intermittent Incident".

U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
Initial diagnosis of AV control unit. B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC C

SULT D
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010064838 E

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation". F
>> Inspection End.

G
AV

U1200 AV CONTROL UNIT
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation".

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system and it is connected to each control
unit by means of communication. It operates each system according to com-
munication signals from the AV control unit.
• AV control unit includes audio function and vehicle information function.
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob-
AV CONTROL UNIT
tain necessary information for the vehicle information function.
• It inputs the automatic brightness ON/OFF signals that are required for the dis-
play dimming control.
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and
parking brake).
DTC Display contents of CONSULT DTC Detection Condition Action to take

Control Unit Replace AV control unit. Re-
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM fer to AV-311, "Removal and
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200] Installation".

A
Replace the AV control unit if this DTC is displayed. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation". B

• It is the master unit of the MULTI AV system and it is connected to each control C
• It is connected to ECM and combination meter via CAN communication to ob- D
AV CONTROL UNIT
• It inputs the signals for driving status recognition (vehicle speed, reverse and E
parking brake).

F

G
Replace AV control unit.
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
U1216 Refer to AV-311, "Remov-
[U1216] detected.
al and Installation".
H
AV

Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Possible malfunction factor
CONSULT
• If the hard disk drive (HDD) is func-
tioning normally, there is a possibil-
ity of a temporary malfunction.
HDD CONN
U1218 AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U1218]
malfunction occurs constantly. Re-
fer to AV-311, "Removal and Instal-
lation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD READ
[U1219]
malfunction occurs constantly. Re- D
lation".
AV

U121A AV CONTROL UNIT
Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD WRITE
U121A AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U121A]
lation".

U121B AV CONTROL UNIT
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD COMM
U121B AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U121B]
lation".
AV

U121C AV CONTROL UNIT
Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD ACCESS
U121C AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U121C]
lation".

U121D AV CONTROL UNIT
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
• If a disc can be played, then there
C
is a possibility of the detection of a
temporary malfunction.
DSP CONN
U121D AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U121D]
lation".
1.CHECK PLAYBACK OF A DISK (CD)

F
Can a disk (CD) be played?
YES >> Malfunction may be detected intermittently.
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation". G
AV

U121E AV CONTROL UNIT
Display contents of
CONSULT
DSP COMM
U121E AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
[U121E]
lation".

NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation".

A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

SULT C
USB CONTROLLER Check that the connection to the USB con-
U1225 USB connection malfunction is detected.
[U1225] nector is normal.
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
• If DVD can be played, then there is
a possibility of the detection of a
U1227 DVD COMM [U1227] AV control unit malfunction is detected. • Replace the AV control unit if the
lation".
1.CHECK PLAYBACK OF A DISK (DVD)

Can a disc (DVD) be played?

A

SULT C
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunction
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly. Refer to AV-311, "Removal
and Installation".
D
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT
iPod CERTIFICATION
U1229 AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly. Refer to AV-311, "Removal
[U1229]
and Installation".

A
B
Display contents of
DTC DTC detection condition Action to take
CONSULT
CONFIG UNFINISH Write configuration data with “MULTI
U122A The writing of configuration data is incomplete. C
[U122A] AV” of CONSULT.
D
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
When U122A is detected, write configuration data with “MULTI AV” of CONSULT.
E
>> Write configuration data with “MULTI AV” of CONSULT. Refer to AV-181, "CONFIGURATION (AV
CONTROL UNIT) : Special Repair Requirement".
F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT
Built-in AUDIO CONN
U122E AV control unit malfunction is detected. occurs constantly. Refer to AV-311, "Removal
[U122E]
and Installation".

U1232 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
Adjust the predictive course line cen-
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the C
U1232 ter position of the steering angle sen-
[1232] steering angle sensor is incomplete.
sor.

D
1.ADJUST THE PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE CENTER POSITION OF THE STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor. E
>> Adjusts the steering angle sensor neutral position on ABS actuator and electrical unit (control unit)
side. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION : F
Special Repair Requirement".
AV

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT

• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from
DISPLAY UNIT
AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes
CONSULT
• Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
tion is detected. • Display unit power supply and
FRONT DISP CONN • Malfunction is detected on communication circuit be- ground circuit.
U1243
[U1243] tween display unit and AV control unit. • Communication circuit between
• Malfunction is detected on communication signal be- display unit and AV control unit.
tween display unit and AV control unit.
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-282, "Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio System With-
out Navigation System".
1.CHECK DISPLAY UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-232, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY OF COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M141
(A) terminals 11, 22 and AV control unit harness connector M117
(B) terminals 56, 44.
A B
Continuity
11 56
M141 M117 Yes
22 44
(A) terminals 11, 22 and ground.
ALNIA0310GB
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
11
M141 Ground No
22

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. A
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
B
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector M141 ter-
minal 11 and ground with an oscilloscope or CONSULT.
C
(+)
(-) Reference signal
Connector Terminal
D
E
M141 11 Ground
ALNIA0311GB
F
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4. G
H
Check signal between display unit harness connector M141 terminal
22 and ground with an oscilloscope or CONSULT.
I
(+)
Connector Terminal
M141 22 Ground K
ALNIA0312GB
PKIB5039J
L
NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-314, "Removal and Installation". M
AV

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
Display contents of
CONSULT
USB OVERCURRENT Check USB harness between the AV
U1263 Detection of over current in USB interface.
[U1263] control unit and USB interface.
1.CHECK USB HARNESS

Visually check USB harness.
YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Replace USB harness.

U1255 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
A
B
• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to the AV control unit.
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER C
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communica-
tion signal and request signal).
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000010064868 D
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT
When either one of the following items are detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuits
and ground circuits. F
are malfunctioning.
• serial communication circuits between AV control unit
SAT CONN tween AV control unit and satellite
U1255 and satellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
[U1255] radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal between AV
control unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
• Request signal circuit between AV G
control unit and satellite radio tun-
• request signal circuit between AV control unit and sat-
er.
H
I
J
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-234, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
K
Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M116 and satellite radio
tuner connector B111.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector AV
M116 (A) and satellite radio tuner harness connector B111 (B).
A B O
Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
28 28
M116 29 B111 29 Yes AWNIA2034ZZ
P
30 30
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector M116 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminals

28
M116 29 Ground No
30
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE
1. Connect AV control unit connector.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M116
and ground.
(+) Voltage
Connector Terminals (−) (Approx.)
28
M116 Ground 7.0V
29
ALNIA1179ZZ
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
5. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector
terminal ground.
(+) Voltage
Connector Terminal (−) (Approx.)
B111 30 Ground 7.0V ALNIA1180ZZ

NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-324, "Removal and Installation".

U1300 AV COMM CIRCUIT
A
U1300 is indicated when a communication signal malfunction occurs. U1300 is indicated along with DTCs that B
identify components connected to the AV control unit through communication lines. Determine the possible
malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C
Display contents of
CONSULT
D
• A/C and AV switch assembly power supply and ground • A/C and AV switch assembly power
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
circuits are malfunctioning. supply and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300] E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and • AV communication circuits be-
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
A/C and AV switch assembly are malfunctioning. tween AV control unit and A/C and
[U1240]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and AV switch assembly.
A/C and AV switch assembly is malfunctioning.
F
AV


AV CONTROL UNIT
parking brake).
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-
U1310
[U1310] circuit. 311, "Removal and Installation".

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010064873
B
out Navigation System". C
1.CHECK FUSES D
Check that the following fuses of the AV control unit are not blown.

E
19 Battery power 24
AV control unit 7 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
F
104 Ignition switch ON or START 3
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2. G
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK H
1. Disconnect AV control unit connectors M115 and M119.
2. Check voltage between the AV control unit connectors M115
and M119 and ground.
I
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
J
Battery Battery
7 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
M115
19 Ground
K
Battery
M119 104 Ground 0V 0V
voltage
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose
M
terminals.
AV
AWNIA1581ZZ
3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK O

2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector
and ground.

M115 20 Ground Yes
Are the inspection results OK?
NO >> Repair AV control unit ground.
AWNIA1930ZZ
DISPLAY UNIT

2. Check voltage between display unit harness connector M141
and ground.
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2
M141 Ground 9V
3
Does specified voltage exist?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. ALNIA0317GB

2. Disconnect the display unit connector M141 and the AV control
unit connector M117.
3. Check continuity between the display unit harness connector
M141 (A) and the AV control unit connector M117 (B).
A B
Continuity
2 59
M141 M117 Yes
3 47 ALNIA0318GB
4. Check continuity between the display unit harness connector M141 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
M141 Ground No
3
YES >> Check AV control unit power and ground supply. Refer to AV-231, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT A

2. Disconnect display unit connector.
B
ground.

C
M141 1 Ground Yes
YES >> Inspection End. D
NO >> Repair harness or connector. ALNIA0319GB
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY

E
A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010064875
F
G
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the fuse of the AC and AV switch assembly is not blown.
H
Unit Terminal Signal name Fuse No.

A/C and AV switch assembly 3 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17 I
Is the fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse. J
1. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98. K
2. Check voltage between the A/C and AV switch assembly con-
nector M98 and ground.
(+) L
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery
M98 3 Ground 0V M
voltage voltage
YES >> GO TO 3. AWNIA1718ZZ AV
terminals.
O
P

2. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly harness
connector M98 and ground.

M98 1 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair harness or ground.
ALNIA0316GB
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER

SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010064877
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses of the satellite radio tuner (factory installed) are not blown.
Satellite radio tuner (factory in- 32 Battery power 24

stalled) 36 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector
B111.
3. Check voltage between the satellite radio tuner (factory
installed) and ground.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
32
B111 Ground WKIA4539E
Battery Battery
36 0V
voltage voltage
Are the voltage readings as specified?
YES >> GO TO 3.

2. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) A
harness connector and ground.

B
B111 35 Ground Yes
YES >> Inspection End. C
NO >> Repair satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness or
connector. AWNIA1721ZZ
REAR VIEW CAMERA D
REAR VIEW CAMERA : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000010064878
out Navigation System". F
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA SIDE) G

2. Shift transmission into Reverse.
3. Check voltage between rear view camera harness connector
H
T101 and ground.
(+) Transmission
(-) Value (Approx.) I
T101 1 Ground Reverse 6V

Is voltage reading approximately 6 volts? J
YES >> GO TO 4. AWNIA1722ZZ
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY) K
2. Disconnect rear view camera and AV control unit connectors.
3. Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector L
T101 (A) terminal 1 and AV control unit harness connector M118
(B) terminal 70.
M
A B
Continuity
T101 1 M118 70 Yes
AV
4. Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector AWNIA1969ZZ
T101 (A) terminal 1 and ground.

O
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal P
T101 1 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REVERSE POSITION INPUT SIGNAL
3. Shift transmission into reverse.
4. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M119 terminal 105 and ground.
(+) Transmission
(-) Value (Approx.)
M119 105 Ground Reverse 12V

Is voltage reading approximately 12 volts?
NO >> Check harness for open or short between AV control unit and back-up lamp relay.
2. Disconnect rear view camera harness connector.
3. Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector
T101 terminal 2 and ground.

T101 2 Ground Yes

1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 24
YES >> GO TO 2.
B131 and ground.
(+) Ignition switch

(-) Value (Approx.)
1 OFF
3 ON
Is battery voltage present as specified? ALNIA0323GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between Bluetooth® control unit and fuse. A
B
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector.
3. Check continuity between Bluetooth® control unit harness connector B131 and ground.
C
Connector. Terminal — Continuity
4
20 D
B131 Ground Yes
21
24
E
NO >> Repair harness or connector. F
MICROPHONE
G
out Navigation System". H
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE) I

minal 4 and ground. J
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal K
R7 4 Ground 5V
Is approximately 5V present?
L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. WKIA5796E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY) M

2. Disconnect microphone and Bluetooth® control unit harness
connectors. AV
B131 (B) terminal 29. O
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal P
R7 4 B131 29 Yes ALNIA0320GB
4. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7 (A) terminal 4 and ground.

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect Bluetooth® control unit harness connector.
3. Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit harness connec-
tor B131 terminal 29 and ground.
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B131 29 Ground 5V
ALNIA0321GB
YES >> Go to 4.
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-333,
2. Disconnect microphone harness connector R7 and Bluetooth®
control unit harness connector B131.
A B
Continuity


RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit. B
C
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
2. Disconnect display unit connector M141 and AV control unit con-
nector M117.
3. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M141 F
(A) terminal 17 and AV control unit harness connector M117 (B)
terminal 40.
G
A B
Continuity
M141 17 M117 40 Yes ALNIA0382GB
H
I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
M141 17 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector M141 and AV control unit con- L
nector M117.
3. Check signal between display unit harness connector M141 ter- M
minal 17 and ground.
(+) AV
(-) Condition Reference signal
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0383GB
Receive
M141 17 Ground audio sig-
nal P
SKIB2238J

YES >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-314, "Removal and Installation".

RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M117.
terminal 39.
A B
Continuity
M141 6 M117 39 Yes ALNIA0384GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 6 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
1. Connect display unit connector M141 and AV control unit con-
nector M117.
minal 6 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0385GB
Receive
nal
SKIB2236J


RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
C
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M117.
terminal 38.
G
A B
Continuity
M141 18 M117 38 Yes ALNIA0386GB
H
I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
M141 18 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
nector M117.
(+) AV
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0387GB
Receive
nal P
SKIB2237J


RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with
AV control unit.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M117.
terminal 41.
A B
Continuity
M141 19 M117 41 Yes ALNIA0388GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 19 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
nector M117.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0389GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3603E


RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display B
unit.
out Navigation System". D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT E

nector M117. F
terminal 43.
G
A B
Continuity
H

(A) terminal 9 and ground. I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal J
M141 9 Ground No
Are continuity results as specified? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL L
nector M117.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
minal 9 and ground.
AV
(+)
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0391GB
Receive
M141 9 Ground audio sig- P
nal
PKIB4948J


HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
In composite image (AUX image, camera image), transmit the vertical synchronizing (VP) signal and horizon-
tal synchronizing (HP) signal from display unit to AV control unit so as to synchronize the RGB images dis-
played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M117.
terminal 45.
A B
Continuity

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 8 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
nector M117.
minal 8 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0396GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3601E


NO >> Replace display unit. Refer to AV-314, "Removal and Installation".
A
AV

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT
played with AV control unit, such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M117.
terminal 57.
A B
Continuity
M141 20 M117 57 Yes ALNIA0392GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 20 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
nector M117.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0393GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3598E


A
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the front door speakers using the front door speaker circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M115 (A) and suspect
speaker connector (B).
M115 (A) terminal and suspect speaker harness connector (B)
terminal.
A B
Continuity
2 1
D3
3 2
M115 Yes
11 1
D103
12 2
M115 (A) terminal and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M115 Ground No AWNIA0031ZZ
11
12
YES >> GO TO 3.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and front speaker connector.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
4. Check the signal between AV control unit harness connector ter-
minals with CONSULT or oscilloscope. A
(+) (-) Reference

Condition
Connector Terminal Terminal signal B
2 3
C
Receive
M115 audio sig-
11 12 nal
D
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace speaker. Refer to AV-319, "Removal and Instal-
lation".
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and
Installation". F
G
AWNIA0032ZZ
AV

TWEETER
TWEETER
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the tweeters using the front door speaker circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
tweeter connector (B).
M115 (A) and suspect tweeter harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
2 1
M143
3 2
M115 Yes
11 1
M144
12 2
M115 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M115 Ground No
11 AWNIA0031ZZ
12
YES >> GO TO 3.

TWEETER
1. Connect AV control unit connector and tweeter connector.
minals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
B
(+) (-) Reference

Condition
Connector Terminal Terminal signal
C
2 3
Receive D
M115 audio sig-
11 12 nal
E
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace tweeter. Refer to AV-318, "Removal and Instal- F
lation".
Installation". G
AWNIA0032ZZ
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the rear door speakers using the rear door speaker circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
speaker connector.
M115 (A) and suspect speaker harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
4 1
D202
5 2
M115 Yes
13 1
D302
14 2
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M115 Ground No
13 AWNIA0033ZZ
14
YES >> GO TO 3.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect AV control unit connector and rear door speaker con-
nector. A
B
(+) (-)
Reference C
Connec- Terminal Condition
Terminal signal
tor
4 5
D
Receive
M115 audio sig- E
13 14 nal
F
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace rear door speaker. Refer to AV-320, "Removal
NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and AWNIA0034ZZ
Installation".
H
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the subwoofer amp. The subwoofer amp. amplifies the audio sig-
nals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, subwoofer amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect subwoofer amp. connector B21 and suspect sub-
woofer connector.
2. Check continuity between subwoofer amp. harness connector
B21 (A) and suspect subwoofer harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
6 1
B16
5 2
B21 Yes
10 1
B17
8 2
3. Check continuity between subwoofer harness connector B21 (A)
and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
6
5
B21 Ground No
10 AWNIA1682ZZ
8
YES >> GO TO 3.

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect subwoofer amp. connector B21 and suspect subwoofer
connector. A
4. Check the signal between subwoofer amp. harness connector
B
B21 terminals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
6 5
D
Receive au-
B21
10 8 dio signal
E
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace suspect subwoofer. Refer to AV-321, "Removal
and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. G
AWNIA1683ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M115 and subwoofer H
speaker amp. connector B21.
M115 (A) and subwoofer amp. harness connector B21 (B). I
A B
Continuity
4 2
5 1
M115 B21 Yes K
13 4
14 3
3. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector L
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
AV
5
M115 Ground No
13 AWNIA1684ZZ
14 O
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.SUBWOOFER SIGNAL CHECK

SUBWOOFER
1. Connect AV control unit connector M115 and subwoofer amp.
connector B21.
3. Push “POWER” switch.
4. Check the signal between AV control unit harness connector
M115 terminals with CONSULT or oscilloscope.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
4 5
Receive
M115 audio sig-
13 14 nal
SKIA0177E

YES >> Replace subwoofer amp. Refer to AV-322, "Removal
and Installation".

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in the steering wheel audio B
out Navigation System". D
1.CHECK STEERING SWITCH RESISTANCE E

1. Disconnect steering switch connector M88.
F
Resistance
(Approx.)
G
Phone/End Depress switch. 321 H

AWNIA0035ZZ
17
Seek (up) Depress switch. 121 I
15

J
Do the steering switches check OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering switch. Refer to AV-326, "Removal and Installation". K
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M115. L
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector M115 and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector M30.
M
6 24
M115 16 M30 31 Yes AV
15 33
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M115 and ground.
O
6
P
M115 16 Ground No
15
YES >> GO TO 3.

STEERING SWITCH

1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) connector M88.
A B
Continuity
24 14
M30 31 M88 15 Yes
33 17


COMMUNICATION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER : Description INFOID:0000000010064909
B
Communication signals are exchanged between the AV control unit and satellite radio tuner using the commu-
nication circuits.
C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-282, "Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio System With- D
E
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
2. Disconnect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector F
B111 and AV control unit connector M116.
3. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
harness connector B111 (A) terminal 28 and AV control unit har- G
ness connector M116 (B) terminal 28.
A B H
Continuity
B111 28 M116 28 Yes ALNIA0334GB
4. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) I

harness connector B111 (A) terminal 28 and ground.
A
J
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B111 28 Ground No
K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. L
2.CHECK HARNESS - 2
harness connector B111 (A) terminal 29 and AV control unit har- M
AV
A B
Continuity
B111 29 M116 29 Yes O
ALNIA0657GB
P
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B111 29 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK HARNESS - 3
harness connector B111 (A) terminal 30 and AV control unit har-
A B
Continuity
B111 30 M116 30 Yes
ALNIA0658GB
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B111 30 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REQ1 SIGNAL
1. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) har-
ness connector B111 terminal 28 and ground with CONSULT or
oscilloscope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
B111 28 Ground WKIA4544E
SKIB3825E

YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK TXD SIGNAL
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness
connector B111 terminal 29 and ground with CONSULT or oscillo-
scope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
SKIB3824E

YES >> GO TO 6. A
6.CHECK RXD SIGNAL
B
scope.
C
(+)
Connector Terminal
D
E
F
SKIB3826E

YES >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-324, "Removal and Installation". G
AV

SOUND SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio tuner to the AV control unit through
the sound signal circuits.
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
connector B111 (A) and AV control unit connector M116 (B).
A B
Continuity
21 21
B111 M116 Yes
22 22 ALNIA0337GB
4. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector B111 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
21
B111 Ground No
22
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL
1. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) and AV control unit.
3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed)
connector B111 terminals 21 and 22 with CONSULT or oscillo-
scope.
(+) (-) Reference signal

Connector Terminal
B111 22 21
ALNIA0880GB
SKIB3609E

NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-324, "Removal and Installation". A
RIGHT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS B
B111 and AV control unit connector M116. C
B111 (A) and AV control unit M116 (B).
D
A B
Continuity
23 23 E
B111 M116 Yes
24 24 ALNIA0338GB
F
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
G
23
B111 Ground No
24
Are continuity results as specified? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL I

2. Turn ignition switch ON. J
scope.
K
Connector Terminal
L
B111 24 23 M
ALNIA0881GB
SKIB3609E
AV
NO >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-324, "Removal and Installation". O

circuits.

connector.
A B
Continuity
7 1
WKIA5795E
B131 8 R7 2 Yes
29 4
®
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit harness connector B131 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B131 8 Ground No
29
YES >> GO TO 2.
nector.
minal 4 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) (-)
Terminal Terminal
PKIB5037J
E
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

CONSULT data monitor item
Dis-
Display Item Vehicle status Remarks
play
ON Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
VHCL SPD SIG
OFF Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) mal.
ON Parking brake is applied. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-

PKB SIG
OFF Parking brake is released. mal.

ON light optical sensor when the light SW
is ON .
ILLUM SIG —
OFF to light when the light SW is OFF or
ON.
IGN SIG —
OFF Ignition switch in ACC position
ON Selector lever in R position
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
OFF mal.
than R
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA3230ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal A
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
2 3
C
Audio sound signal front LH Output ON Receive audio signal
(L) (B/W)
D
SKIA0177E
4 5
Audio sound signal rear LH Output ON Receive audio signal
(LG) (B/Y)
F
SKIA0177E
Depress volume DOWN G

0.7V
switch.
6 15 Depress volume UP switch. 1.3V
Steering switch signal A Input ON
(W/G) (L/B) H

Ignition I
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage
(V/Y)
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF J
(R/L) Lighting switch is ON. Battery voltage
11 12 Audio sound signal front

Output ON Receive audio signal
(BR) (B/R) RH
L
SKIA0177E
13 14 AV
Audio sound signal rear RH Output ON Receive audio signal
(LG) (O)
SKIA0177E O
Depress SOURCE switch. 0V

P
16 15 1.3V
Steering switch signal B Input ON Depress switch.
(GR/L) (L/B)

Ignition
19
(Y/R)
OFF

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
20
(B)
ON
Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(Y/L) (W/L) LH is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
24 23 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
Input switch
(BR/L) (Y/G) RH is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(R) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON
SKIA9299J
Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Input switch
(B) (SAT→CONT) is selected
ON
SKIA9300J
Ignition
30 Communication signal When satellite radio mode
Ground Output switch
(G) (CONT→SAT) is selected
ON
SKIA9301J
34
— Antenna main — — — —
(B)
35
— Antenna power — — — —
(B)

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
36 When AUX mode is select- C
Ground AUX image signal Output switch
(W) ed
ON
SKIB2251J D
Ignition
37
Ground AUX image ground — switch — 0V
(B)
ON E
Start confirmation/adjust-
ment mode, and then dis- F
Ignition
38 play color bar by selecting
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch
(W) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen. G
SKIB2237J
Start confirmation/adjust- H
ment mode, and then dis-
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch
(R) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON I
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
J
Ignition
40 play color bar by selecting K
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch
(B) “Color Spectrum Bar” on
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
L
SKIB2238J
M
Ignition
41
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(G)
ON
AV
SKIB3603E
Ignition O
42 — RGB synchronizing ground — switch — 0V
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
RGB image 5V
Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) AUX image
ON
PKIB4948J
Ignition
44 Communication signal When adjusting display
Ground Input switch
(BR) (DISP→CONT) brightness
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
45 Horizontal synchronizing
Ground Input switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
46 Ignition
Ground Signal ground — — 0V
(LG) switch
Ignition
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9V
(O)
ACC
49 — Shield — — — —
50 — Shield — — — —
55 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
57 Vertical synchronizing (VP)
(W) signal
On
SKIB3598E
Ignition
58
Ground Inverter ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
59
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC
C
Ignition
65 Rear view camera video in
(W)
Ground
(+)
Input switch With rear view camera ON D
ON
SKIB2251J E
Ignition F
66 74
Aux image signal Input switch When aux mode is selected
(LG) (V)
ON
G
SKIB2251J
Ignition
70 Shift selector is in R posi- H
Ground RV_CAM_SIG Output switch 6V
(L) tion
ACC
71
Ground RV_CAM_GND — — — —
(V/G) I
72 — Shield — — — —
73 — Shield — — — —
J
ment mode, and then Voice
Ignition
80 79
TEL voice audio signal Input switch
Microphone Test by select- K
(BR) (Y) ing “Voice Microphone
ON
Test” on Handsfree Micro-
phone screen.
SKIB3609E
L
81 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
85 M
(BR)
ON
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — — AV
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
88 AV communication signal 1 Input/ O
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
89 AV communication signal 1 Input/
— — — —
(P) (L) Output P
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(G) (L) Output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
95 97 When AUX mode is select-
AUX audio signal RH Input switch
(B) (R) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
AUX audio signal LH Input switch
(W) (R) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
103 Pressing the eject switch 0V

Ground CD eject signal Input —
(SB) Except for above 3.3V
Ignition
104
Ground Ignition signal Input switch — Battery voltage
(G)
ON
Ignition R position Battery voltage
105
Ground Reverse signal Input switch
(P/B) Other than R position 0V
ON
Ignition Parking brake ON 0V
106
Ground Parking brake signal Input switch
(G/R) Parking brake OFF Battery voltage
ON
Ignition
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(V/W) (8-pulse) prox. 25 MPH (40 km/h)
ON
SKIA6649J
120
— USB ground — — — —
(B)
121
— USB D- — — — —
(W)
122
— V BUS signal — — — —
(R)
123
— USB D+ — — — —
(G)
DTC Index INFOID:0000000010064916
Self-diagnosis results display item
DTC Display item Refer to

U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] AV-206, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-207, "DTC Logic"
U1200 Cont Unit [U1200] AV-208, "DTC Logic"

AV CONTROL UNIT
A
U1216 CAN CONT [U1216] AV-209, "DTC Logic"
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-210, "DTC Logic"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-211, "DTC Logic" B
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-212, "DTC Logic"
U121B HDD COMM [U121B] AV-213, "DTC Logic"
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-214, "DTC Logic" C
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-215, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U121E DSP COMM [U121E] AV-216, "Diagnosis Procedure"
D
U1225 USB CONTROLLER [U1225] AV-217, "DTC Logic"
U1227 DVD COMM [U1227] AV-218, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV-219, "DTC Logic" E
U1229 iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229] AV-220, "DTC Logic"
U122A CONFIG UNFINISH [U122A] AV-221, "Diagnosis Procedure"
F
U122E Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E] AV-222, "DTC Logic"
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-223, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-224, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
U1255 SATELLITE TUNER [U1255] AV-227, "Description"
U1263 USB OVERCURRENT [U1263] AV-226, "Diagnosis Procedure"
H
U1310 CONTROL UNIT (AV) [U1310] AV-230, "DTC Logic"
U1300 • AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300]
AV-229, "Description"
U1240 • SWITCH CONN [U1240]
I
AV

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA1727ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1
(B)
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9V
(O)
ACC
Ignition
4
(B)
ON
5 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J
7 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
Ground Output switch —
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E

DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image displayed 5V B
9
Ignition C
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch At rear view camera image
(B)
ON displayed
D
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness F
ON
PKIB5039J
G
Ignition
13
(BR)
ON
H
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
I
Ignition
15 When AUX mode is select- J
Ground AUX image signal Input switch
(W) ed
ON
SKIB2251J K
ment mode, and then dis- L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
M
SKIB2238J
AV
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch
(W)
ON
“Color Spectrum Bar” on O
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
P

DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
19
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E
Ignition
(W) signal
On
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —

SUBWOOFER AMP
SUBWOOFER AMP
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
ALNIA1163ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal F
Signal Condition
(Wire color) Voltage
Item input/
Ignition (approx.)
switch G
H
2 1
Audio signal LH Input ON Receive audio signal.
(LG) (O)
I
SKIB3609E
4 3
Audio signal RH Input ON Receive audio signal.
(L) (P) K
SKIB3609E
L
6 5 Subwoofer audio signal M

(L) (P) LH
AV
SKIB3609E
7
Ground Ground Input ON — —
(B)
O
9
Ground ACC power supply Input ACC — Battery voltage
(G)

(R) (BR) RH
SKIB3609E

ALNIA1166ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal Description
Reference value
Input/ Condition
+ – Signal name (Approx.)
Output
Ignition
22 21 Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio
Output switch
(W) (BR) LH mode is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
Output switch
(B) (Y) RH mode is selected
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio
(R) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON
SKIA9299J
Ignition
29 Communication signal When satellite radio
(V) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON
SKIA9300J

Reference value A
Input/ Condition
Output
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(L) (CONT→SAT) mode is selected C
ON
SKIA9301J
D
Ignition
32
(P)
OFF
35
E
— Shield — — — —
(B)
Ignition
36
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — Battery voltage F
(GR)
ACC
AV

TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA0662ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
(wire color) Reference value
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
output
1
(V)
Ignition
2
Ground ACC power Input switch – Battery voltage
(GR)
ACC/ON
Ignition
3 switch
(O) ON/
START
Ignition
4
Ground Ground – switch – 0V
(B)
ON
7
8 MIC in signal Input – – –
(L)
9 10
Ignition Bluetooth® control
Audio out Output switch unit sends audio
(BR) (Y)
ACC/ON signal
SKIB3609E
Ignition
20
(B)
ON
Ignition
21
(B)
ON
Ignition
24
(B)
ON

Terminal
Description
(wire color) Reference value A
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
output
B
Ignition When vehicle

28 Vehicle speed sig- C
Ground Input switch speed is approx.
(BR) nal (8-pulse)
ON 40 km/h (25 MPH)
PKIA1935E D
Ignition
29
Ground Microphone power Output switch – 5V
(R)
ON E
33
– Bluetooth® anten- – – – —
(B) na
34 Bluetooth® anten-
F
– – – – —
(B) na
35
– M-CAN1 (+) – – – — G
(L)
36
– M-CAN1 (-) – – – —
(P)
37 – Shield – – – — H
40
– M-CAN2 (-) – – – —
(R)
I
42
– M-CAN2 (-) – – – —
(G)
AV

COLOR DISPLAY
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM
COLOR DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram - Without BOSE Audio System Without Navigation System INFOID:0000000010064921
ABNWA1944GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1945GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA1946GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1947GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA1948GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5150GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5151GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5152GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5153GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5154GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5155GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5156GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5157GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5158GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5159GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5160GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5161GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5162GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5163GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5164GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5165GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5166GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM

Malfunction in AV control unit.
The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
Refer to AV-282, "Wiring Diagram - With-
out BOSE Audio System Without Naviga-
tion System".
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-231, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
AV control unit and speaker.
(tweeter).
No sound comes out or the level of the Refer to AV-252, "Diagnosis Procedure"
sound is low. (rear door speaker).
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker subwoofer amp. and subwoofer.
tweeter RH, rear door speaker LH, rear (subwoofer).
door speaker RH, rear subwoofer LH, rear • Malfunction in speaker.
subwoofer RH) does not output sound. Refer to AV-319, "Removal and Installa-
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (subwoofer).
• Malfunction in AV control unit.
tion".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
Noise comes out from all speakers. Refer to AV-311, "Removal and Installa-
tion".
• Poor connector connection of speaker. B
AV control unit and speaker.
C
(tweeter).
Refer to AV-252, "Diagnosis Procedure" D
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- subwoofer amp. and subwoofer.
er (front door speaker LH, front door speak- Refer to AV-254, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
Noise is mixed with audio. er RH, tweeter LH, tweeter RH, rear door (subwoofer).
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear • Malfunction in speaker.
subwoofer LH, rear subwoofer RH). Refer to AV-319, "Removal and Installa-
tion" (front door speaker). F
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (rear door speaker). G
tion" (subwoofer).
H
tion".
Noise is mixed with radio only (when the ve- Poor connector connection of antenna or
hicle hits a bump or while driving over bad antenna feeder. I
• Other audio sounds are normal. • Antenna amp. ON signal circuit malfunc-
• Any radio station cannot be received or tion. J
(e.g. a place with clear view and no ob- antenna feeder.
stacles generating external noises). Refer to AV-327, "Location of Antenna". K
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self or AV control unit.
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder. L
Refer to AV-202, "CONSULT Function • Poor connector connection of antenna or
(MULTI AV)". antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-327, "Location of Antenna".
No satellite radio reception. M
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT • Poor connector connection of antenna or
self diagnosis result. antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-202, "CONSULT Function • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting AV
(MULTI AV)". nut.
Refer to "SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROU- O
or trim section.
RELATED TO HANDS-FREE PHONE P

the vehicle.

AUDIO SYSTEM
Check Compatibility
NOTE:
NOTE:
any further action.

play at the guide).
®
®
established. Replace Bluetooth control unit. Refer to
formed, however, voice between each • Malfunction in AV control unit. Replace
other cannot be heard during the conver- AV control unit. Refer to AV-311, "Remov-
sation. al and Installation".
not work.


A
etc.).
NOISE
D
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
F
G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
I
ing. • Motor

AV
lowing conditions:
NOTE: P

call.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
ual.
WARNING: E
F
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
K
L
AV
- Oily dirt: O
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/O BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWNIA1926ZZ K
1. AV control unit 2. AV control unit bracket LH 3. AV control unit bracket RH

4. A/C auto amp. 5. Cluster lid C (with A/C and AV switch Clip L
assembly attached)
AV CONTROL UNIT
M
Removal
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform "READ CONFIGURATION" to save current vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to AV-180, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair AV
Requirement".
2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to IP-11, "Removal and Installation". O
3. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".

AV CONTROL UNIT
4. Remove the av control unit screws (A), then pull out the av con-
trol unit (1), disconnect the av control unit connectors and
remove the av control unit (1).
ALNIA1131ZZ
Installation
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-180, "ADDITIONAL
SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
Removal
2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".
3. Remove the A/C and AV switch assembly screws (A), then pull
out the A/C and AV switch assembly (1) from cluster lid C.
ALNIA1215ZZ
Installation

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the four multifunction switch screws (A) and remove
the multifunction switch (2) from cluster lid D (1). C
: Metal clip
AWNIA1917ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AWNIA1928ZZ
1. Audio display unit bracket 2. Audio display unit 3. Cluster lid D

4. Multifunction switch A. Audio display unit bracket screws B. Audio display unit screws
Metal Clip
REMOVAL
2. Remove the audio display unit bracket screws (A).
3. Pull out the audio display unit and bracket assembly (1).
4. Disconnect the harness connectors from the audio display unit
and bracket assembly (1) and remove.
ALNIA1139ZZ

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
5. Remove the audio display unit screws on the sides and remove the audio display unit from the audio dis-
play unit brackets. A
INSTALLATION
B
AV

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Release the pawl from the back of the center console to remove
the USB interface (1).
ALNIA1401ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUX IN JACK
AUX IN JACK
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the center console. Refer to IP-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the center console bin box.
C
3. Remove the auxiliary input jacks screws (A), then remove the
auxiliary input jacks (1).
F
ALNIA1162ZZ
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. G
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
REMOVAL
AWNIA2220ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
(1) and remove.
I
ALNIA1133ZZ
INSTALLATION J
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
ALNIA1135ZZ
INSTALLATION

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
ALNIA1134ZZ
G
1. Subwoofer LH 2. Subwoofer RH A. Subwoofer screws
REMOVAL H
I
INSTALLATION
AV

SUBWOOFER AMP
SUBWOOFER AMP
ALNIA1136ZZ
1. Subwoofer amp. and bracket A. Subwoofer amp. bracket screws
REMOVAL
NOTE:
The subwoofer amp. can be removed without removing the parcel amp finisher. If moving the subwoofer
amp. and bracket, it is necessary to remove the parcel shelf finisher.
4. Remove the subwoofer amp. screws.
5. Disconnect the harness connectors from the subwoofer amp. and remove.
INSTALLATION

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
A
G
ALNIA1137ZZ
1. Bose speaker amp. A. Screws

H
REMOVAL
NOTE:
4. Disconnect the Bose speaker amp. connectors and remove the Bose speaker amp.
INSTALLATION K
AV

REMOVAL
5. Remove the satellite radio tuner unit screws (A), disconnect the
harness connectors (B) from the satellite radio tuner (1) and
remove.
ALNIA1153ZZ
INSTALLATION

SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
A
REMOVAL B
1. Lower the headlining at the rear. Refer to INT-33, "Exploded View".
2. Disconnect the harness connector (A) from satellite radio
antenna. C
3. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut (B) and the satellite radio
antenna (1).
D
ALNIA1141ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL
(B).
ALNIA1132ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
A
AWNIA1765ZZ
I
1. AV control unit 2. AV control unit antenna feeder 3. In-line connectors M103, M501
4. Antenna amp. 5. Window antenna 6. Satellite radio antenna feeder
7. Satellite radio antenna J
K
ELEMENT CHECK
each side. L
AV
SEL250I
O
P
SEL122R

AUDIO ANTENNA
SEL252I

SEL253I
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
drawing pen.
NOTE:
PIIA0215E

AUDIO ANTENNA
B
SEL012D
D
hot air outlet.
hours.
F
G
SEL013D
AV

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
REMOVAL
(1).
ALNIA0043ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
1. Remove the map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-84, "Removal and Installation".
C
ALNIA0928ZZ
F
3. Remove the map lamp covers (1), then remove the map lamp
assembly cover (2).
G
I
ALNIA0929ZZ

(1).
ALNIA0930ZZ M
INSTALLATION
AV

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. Refer to PG-68, "Removal and Installation (Battery Tray)".
ALNIA1144ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
C
D
6. Disconnect the Bluetooth control unit connectors (B) and
remove the Bluetooth control unit (1).
E
ALNIA1154ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REMOVAL
1. Remove the license plate finisher. Refer to EXL-166, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove trunk lid finisher. Refer to INT-36, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect the rear view camera connector (B), press the rear
view camera tab (A) and remove the rear view camera (1).
ALNIA1156ZZ
INSTALLATION
Adjustment INFOID:0000000010064949
REAR VIEW CAMERA

For adjustment on the rear view camera, refer to DLK-12, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".

< BASIC INSPECTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
AWNIA2486GB M
DETAILED FLOW AV
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. O
tion occurred).
P
>> GO TO 2
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 4
NOTE:
Start with the diagnosis for the CAN communication system if “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] or CONTROL
>> GO TO 5
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-472, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5
NOTE:
>> GO TO 6
6.CHECK AFTER REPAIR
parts.
YES >> GO TO 3
NO >> GO TO 7
7.FINAL CHECK
are present.
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Inspection End.

A
MENT
B
MENT : Description INFOID:0000000009471279
C
Adjust the center position of the possible route line of the rear view monitor if it is shifted.
MENT : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000009471280 D
1.STEERING OPERATION
E
Steer the steering wheel to the leftmost and rightmost positions.
>> GO TO 2
F
2.DRIVING
Drive the vehicle straight ahead 100 m (328.1 ft) or more at a speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
G
>> END
H
INFOID:0000000009471281
I
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before
replacement. J
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. K
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
L
M
AV
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”. O
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE AV CONTROL UNIT P
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-481, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-338, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000009471283
• Configuration has three functions as follows.
READ CONFIGURATION
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

Select “CONFIGURATION” of AV control unit.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
>> WORK END

Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit.
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END

CAUTION:

A
MANUAL SETTING ITEM
Note
Items Setting value
B
LHD —
STEERING
RHD —
MODE 1 BASE C
GRADE
MODE 2 OTHER
NORMAL —
ENGINE TYPE D
HYBRID —
NORMAL NORMAL
BODY TYPE
CONV CONVERTIBLE E
REAR + SIDE REAR + SIDE CAMERA F
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH —
G
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
ROD TYPE — H
ANTENNA TYPE
LONG TYPE —
WITHOUT —
DUAL-ZONE AUTO TEMP I
WITH —
WITHOUT —
DVD PLAY FUNCTION
WITH — J
K
H/B 2DR H/B 2 DOOR
H/B 4DR H/B 4 DOOR L
COUPE T COUPE T BAR
WGN 4DR 2 49H WAGON 4 DOOR (WIDE) M
H/T 2DR 2 H/T 2 DOOR (HIGHROOF)
BODY TYPE AV
WGN 2DR WAGON 2 DOOR O
P
VAN 2DR VAN 2 DOOR
VAN 4DR 1 VAN 4 DOOR
CONV CONVERTIBLE

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUDIO SYSTEM
AWNIA2697GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
AUDIO SYSTEM
• AV control unit B
• Display unit
• Window antenna C
• Tweeters D
• Center speaker
• Rear subwoofer E
sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio signals before
sending them to the front door speakers, tweeters, center speaker, rear door speakers and rear subwoofers.
Refer to Owner's Manual for audio system operating instructions. F
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The satellite radio system consists of the following components
• Satellite antenna G
• Satellite radio tuner
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the satellite radio tuner from the satellite
antenna. The satellite radio tuner then sends audio signals to the AV control unit. H
Volume level of this system goes up and down automatically in proportion to the vehicle speed. The control I
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AWNIA3231ZZ
1. Tweeter LH M51 2. Center speaker M130 3. Tweeter RH M52

4. AV control unit M152, M153, M154, 5. Display unit M141 6. A/C and AV switch assembly M98
M155, M156, M157, M158, M159 (lo-
cated behind A/C and AV switch as-
sembly)

AUDIO SYSTEM
7. Steering angle sensor M53 [located 8. Steering wheel audio control switch- 9. USB interface M211 (view in center
in steering column behind combina- es console) A
tion switch(spiral cable)]
10. Aux jack M209 11. Rear subwoofers (view under rear 12. Satellite radio tuner (if equipped)
parcel shelf) B111
LH B106
B
RH B107
13. Bluetooth® control unit B128, B130, 14. BOSE speaker amp B109, B110 15. Microphone R7
B131 C
16. Rear view camera T101 17. Front door speaker 18. Rear door speaker
LH D3 LH D202
RH D103 RH D302 D
E
Controls audio system, USB connection,AUX IN connection and satellite ra-
AV control unit
dio system functions F
Display unit Displays all audio and climate control related information
Receives power (amp ON) and audio signals from AV control unit and out-
BOSE speaker amp. G
puts audio signals to each speaker.
• Audio operation can be operated
• Steering switch signal is output to AV control unit
H
Front door speakers
Tweeters
• Outputs high range sounds I
Center speaker
• Outputs audio signal from BOSE speaker amp. J
Rear door speakers
Rear subwoofer
• Outputs low range sounds K
• Receives radio signals from satellite antenna
Satellite radio tuner (if equipped)
• Sends audio signals to AV control unit
Satellite antenna (if equipped) Audio signal (satellite radio) is received and output to AV control unit. L
AV

AWNIA1957GB
When the shift selector is in the R position, the display shows a view to the rear of the vehicle. Lines which
indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed.

AV
P
AWNIA3231ZZ

M155, M156, M157, M158, M159 (lo-
sembly)

in steering column behind combina- es console)
parcel shelf) B111
LH B106
RH B107
B131
LH D3 LH D202
RH D103 RH D302

• Sends camera ON signal to the rear view camera
AV control unit • Receives camera image signal from the rear view camera
• Receives camera ON signal from the AV control unit
Rear view camera
• Sends image signal to the AV control unit

A
D
AWNIA2698GB

E
NOTE: F
system.
Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® cellular telephone to make a wireless con- G
trol unit. When a cellular telephone or the Bluetooth® control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired H
I
the Bluetooth® control unit is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 20 sec- J
Recognition system. K
L
• Initiate self-diagnosis of the Bluetooth® telephone system M
• Adjust the volume of calls AV
MICROPHONE
control unit. The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis. O
AV CONTROL UNIT
The AV control unit receives signals from the Bluetooth® control unit and sends audio signals to the BOSE P
speaker amp. then on to the speakers.

AWNIA3231ZZ

M155, M156, M157, M158, M159 (lo-
sembly)

parcel shelf) B111
LH B106
B
RH B107
B131 C
LH D3 LH D202
RH D103 RH D302 D
E
AV control unit • Receives telephone voice signal from Bluetooth® control unit
• Sends telephone voice and voice guidance signals to the speakers F
• Receives audio signals from the AV control unit
BOSE speaker amp.
• Outputs amplified audio signals to the speakers.
Front door speaker G
Front tweeter
through the BOSE speaker amp.
Center speaker H
I
Microphone Sends voice signals to Bluetooth® control unit
Bluetooth® control unit Controls hands-free phone functions

J
Bluetooth® antenna Sends telephone voice signal to Bluetooth® control unit
AV

MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

checked.
Self-Diagnosis Mode
• Press the BACK switch and the switch of the 8-direction
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal.
NOTE:
JSNIA1072GB

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
MULTI AV SYSTEM ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit
• Perform a CONSULT diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., if the screen does not display
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
• Self-diagnosis mode performs the AV control unit diagnosis and the connection diagnosis between each of
the units that make up the system, and it indicates the results to the display.
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking,
modifying or adjusting generally requires human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis
Self-Diagnosis
• Perform the connection diagnosis between each of the units.

Mode Description
A
The confirmation of the tint with the color spectrum bar display and shad-
Display Diagnosis
ing of color with the gradation bar display can be performed.
Vehicle Signals B
lights, ignition switch, and reverse.
System malfunctions and the frequency when occurring in the past are
Error History (Detailed) displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and place C
Confirmation/ that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Adjustment
The signal connected to camera control unit can be checked and the
Camera Cont. guiding line position that overlaps rear view camera image can be adjust- D
ed.
The communication condition of each unit of MULTI AV system can be E
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory. F
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine. G
3. While pressing the SETTING button, turn the volume control dial
clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When the H
self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
by pressing the BACK button. I
JSNIA1073GB
K
items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be
selected. L
AV
AWNIA1735GB
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
O
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self-diagnosis”.
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch
operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot start up if any P
malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between
AV control unit and multifunction switch.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-
diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivi-
sion screen indicates progress of the trouble diagnosis.
JSNIA0139GB

2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com-

Con-
Diagnosis results Unit nection
line
Normal Green Green
Unit malfunction Note Red Green AWNIA1973GB
NOTE:
• Only the control unit (AV control unit) is displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV con-
- If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined accord-
ing to the following order of priority: red > gray.
AWNIA1960GB
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function cannot
be started up if any malfunction is detected in the AV communication circuit between AV control unit and multi-
function switch.
Self-diagnosis Result Chart

to take
Check AV control unit power supply

Malfunction is detected in AV control and ground circuits. When detecting no
unit power supply and ground circuits. malfunction in those components, re-
place AV control unit.
AWNIA1974GB
NOTE:
When a control unit malfunction is detected (red in
unit display), connection malfunctions with other
connection unit may be displayed.
“Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit
malfunction”

to take A
When either one of the following items B

are detected:
tween AV control unit and front dis- Serial communication circuits between
play unit are malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit. C
• serial communication signal between
AV control unit and front display unit
is malfunctioning.
D
AWNIA1975GB

E
detected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply
ing. F
dio tuner are malfunctioning.
dio tuner.
• serial communication or request sig-
• Request signal circuit between AV G
nal between AV control unit and sat-
control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• request signal circuit between AV
control unit and satellite radio tuner is H
AWNIA2291GB
malfunctioning.
detected: I
ing.
• AV communication circuits between camera control unit and Bluetooth® J
control unit.
camera control unit and Bluetooth®
control unit are malfunctioning.
• AV communication circuits between K
trol unit. (without DVD player mod-
els)
trol unit are malfunctioning. (without
DVD player models)
DVD player and camera control unit.
(with DVD player models)
L
DVD player and camera control unit
are malfunctioning. (with DVD player
AWNIA1977GB
models) multifunction switch and Bluetooth®
• AV communication signal between control unit. (without rear view cam- M
era)
AV control unit and Bluetooth® con-
trol unit is malfunctioning.
NOTE: AV
The number of units that are displayed on the on board self-diagnosis display according to equipment.
O
P

screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the RETURN switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjust-
ment Mode screen.
AWNIA1965GB
Display Diagnosis
AWNIA1966GB
The tint of the color bar indication is as per the following list if RGB image signal error is detected.
R (red) signal error : Light blue (Cyan) tint

G (green) signal error : Purple (Magenta) tint
B (blue) signal error : Yellow tint
Vehicle Signals
AWNIA1744GB

Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed ON
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Parking brake

A
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
ON Ignition switch ON B
Ignition —
OFF Ignition switch in the ACC position
Shift the selector lever to the “R” po-
ON
sition C
Shift the selector lever to a position
OFF
other than the “R” position
Speaker Test D
screen. Press “START and NEXT” to generate a test tone in a
speaker. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. E
Press “End” to stop the test tones.
NOTE:
The frequency of test tone emitted from each speaker is as follows.
F
Tweeter : 3 kHz
Front speaker : 300 Hz
G
Rear speaker : 1 kHz
JSNIA0150GB
Climate Control H
On-board self-diagnosis is not supported. Only CONSULT is supported.
I
Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned J
Count up method A K
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when IGN switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if the
condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle.
L
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when IGN switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even if
the condition is normal at the next IGN ON cycle. M
AV
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV communication)
O

JSNIA0151GB
Error Item
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items.

CAN communication malfunction is detect-
ed.
(MULTI AV)".
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV) Replace the AV control unit.
tected:
• front display unit power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Front display unit power supply and
• serial communication circuits between ground circuits.
AV control unit and front display unit are • Serial communication circuits between
malfunctioning. AV control unit and front display unit.
• serial communication signal between AV
control unit and front display unit is mal-
functioning.

A
tected:
• satellite radio tuner power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. B
• Satellite radio tuner power supply and
• serial communication circuits between
ground circuits.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner
• Serial communication circuits between
SAT Connection Error are malfunctioning.
AV control unit and satellite radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal
• Request signal circuit between AV con-
C
between AV control unit and satellite ra-
trol unit and satellite radio tuner.
dio tuner is malfunctioning.
• request signal circuit between AV control
unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunc- D
tioning.
tected: E
• multifunction switch power supply and
ground circuits are malfunctioning. • Multifunction switch power supply and
• AV COMM CIRCUIT • AV communication circuits between AV ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error control unit and multifunction switch are • AV communication circuits between AV F
malfunctioning. control unit and multifunction switch.
• AV communication signal between AV
control unit and multifunction switch is
malfunctioning. G
Camera Cont.
The two functions of “Connection Confirmation” and “Adjust Offset of Rear View Camera” are available. H
CONNECTION CONFIRMATION
The vehicle speed sensor, parking brake, park lights, ignition switch
and reverse sensor can be inspected.
I
AWNIA1744GB
L
Diagnosis item Display Vehicle status
When steering the vehicle with ignition switch ON (remains ON until connection
ON
mode is stopped when it is turned ON).
M
Steer. Angle Sensor • Ignition switch at ACC.

OFF
• No steering with ignition switch ON.
AV
ON Selector lever is in “R” with ignition switch ON.
• Ignition switch at ACC. O
Reverse Sensor OFF
• Selector lever is in position other than “R” with ignition switch ON.
— Malfunction detected in camera-connection recognition signal.
ON Vehicle speed is more than 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON. P
Vehicle Speed Sensor OFF
• Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 MPH) with ignition switch ON.
Side view Switch — Not used.
ADJUST OFFSET OF REAR VIEW CAMERA

Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear-
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor cam-
era.
JSNIA0085GB
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis

detected in the past and displays “0” if a malfunction is detected. It
increases by 1 if the status is normal at the next ignition switch ON
cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39.
• The error counter is erased if reset.
Malfunction counter
(Past)
Tx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AWNIA1967GB
Rx (ECM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (Cluster) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (HVAC) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (USM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
Rx (STRG) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
AV COMM Diagnosis
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
• If it resets, the error counter is erased.
Status Counter
Items
(Current) (Past)
C Tx(ITM-SW) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39 AWNIA1978GB
C Rx(PrimarySW-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39
C Rx(BTHF-ITM) OK / UNKWN OK / 0 - 39

control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)
JSNIA0154GB
Initialize Settings

possible. A
CAUTION:
B
details, refer to AV-350, "Diagnosis Description".
AWNIA2038GB
D
APPLICATION ITEMS E

F
G
Configuration
H
AV Communication
I
AV&NAVI C/U
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter. J
ECU IDENTIFICATION
K
L
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected.
M
AV
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts ac-
CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect- O
ed.
malfunction is detected. P
Cont Unit [U1200] Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
tion occurs constantly.
CAN CONT [U1216]
SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV control unit malfunction is detected.
Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E]

HDD CONN [U1218]
HDD READ [U1219]
ing normally, there is a possibility of a
HDD WRITE [U121A] AV control unit malfunction is detected. temporary malfunction.
HDD COMM [U121B]
HDD ACCESS [U121C]
Check that the connection to the USB con-
nector is normal.
plete.
complete.
circuits malfunction is detected. • Communication circuits between AV
Satellite radio tuner malfunction is detect- Replace the satellite radio tuner if the mal-
SAT CONN [U1255]
ed. function occurs constantly.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
malfunctioning.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG

A
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
Expose the auto light optical sensor B
ON.
On Ignition switch ON C
IGN SIG
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is D
Off normal.
than R
SELECTION FROM MENU E

F
Item to be selected Description
VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG G
ILLUM SIG The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” is selected.
IGN SIG
H
REV SIG
WORK SUPPORT
I
Conditions Description
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT formed. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE J
CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows. K
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current AV control unit. L
READ CONFIGURATION
WRITE CONFIGURATION-Config file Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data. M
AV

The Bluetooth® control unit has two diagnostic checks. The first diagnostic check is performed automatically
BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS

• Bluetooth® inquiry check
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON.
(PHONE/SEND) button for at least 5 seconds. The Bluetooth®
AWNIA1979ZZ
“Diagnostics mode” prompt. The Bluetooth® system will sound a
5-second beep.
hear prompts.
technician. Refer to AV-362, "Work Flow".

phone test fails, refer to AV-362, "Work Flow".


®
“Bluetooth antenna shorted” 2. Replace Bluetooth® antenna. Refer to AV-502, "Removal and Installation".

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B
tronic control units are equipped on a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with other C
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only. D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Display contents of CON- F

SULT
When AV control unit is not transmitting or re-
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ceiving CAN communication signal for 2 sec- CAN communication system. G
onds or more.

H
I
YES >> Refer to “LAN system”. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart". J
AV

Initial diagnosis of AV control unit.

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. AV control unit.

When DTC U1010 is detected, replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-481, "Removal and Installation".
>> Inspection End.

A

AV CONTROL UNIT
parking brake).

F

G
Control Unit Replace AV control unit. Re-
An internal malfunction is detected in AV control unit
U1200 FLASH- ROM fer to AV-481, "Removal and
(FLASH-ROM).
[U1200] Installation".
H
AV


AV CONTROL UNIT
parking brake).

Replace AV control unit.
CAN CONT Internal malfunction of AV control unit (CAN controller) is
U1216 Refer to AV-481, "Remov-
[U1216] detected.

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD CONN
[U1218]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD READ
[U1219]
lation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD WRITE
[U121A]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD COMM
[U121B]
lation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD ACCESS
[U121C]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
DSP CONN
[U121D]
lation".


A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
DSP COMM
[U121E]
lation".

F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
lation".

F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT
and Installation".

A

SULT C
iPod CERTIFICATION
[U1229]
and Installation".
D
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
U122A The writing of configuration data is incomplete.


A

SULT C
Built-in AUDIO CONN
[U122E]
and Installation".
D
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the
sor.
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.
side. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION :

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
• Display image is controlled by the serial communication from AV control unit.
• Inputs the RGB image signal (RGB, RGB area and RGB synchronizing) from
DISPLAY UNIT C
AV control unit and the auxiliary image signal from the auxiliary input jacks.
• Outputs the synchronizing signals (HP and VP) to the AV control unit.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000009471332 D
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Possible causes E
CONSULT
• Display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
tion is detected. • Display unit power supply and
FRONT DISP CONN • Malfunction is detected on communication circuit be- ground circuit. F
U1243
[U1243] tween display unit and AV control unit. • Communication circuit between
• Malfunction is detected on communication signal be- display unit and AV control unit.
tween display unit and AV control unit.
G
H
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-449, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio system Without
Navigation System".
I

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-389, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts. K
2. Disconnect display unit connector and AV control unit connector.
(A) terminals 11, 22 and AV control unit harness connector
M154 (B) terminals 56, 44. M
A B
Continuity AV
11 56
M141 M154 Yes
22 44 O
ALNIA0310GB
P
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
11
M141 Ground No
22

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M141 11 Ground
ALNIA0311GB
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M141 22 Ground
ALNIA0312GB
PKIB5039J


U1263 USB
U1263 USB
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
U1263 Detection of over current in USB interface. C
D
1.CHECK USB HARNESS
F
AV


• Inputs the satellite radio signal from satellite radio antenna and outputs the
sound signal to the AV control unit.
• It is controlled with the AV control unit and serial communication (communica-
tion signal and request signal).
Display contents of
CONSULT
• satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuits
are malfunctioning.
• serial communication circuits between AV control unit
SAT CONN tween AV control unit and satellite
U1255 and satellite radio tuner are malfunctioning.
[U1255] radio tuner.
• serial communication or request signal between AV
• Request signal circuit between AV
control unit and satellite radio tuner is malfunctioning.
control unit and satellite radio tun-
• request signal circuit between AV control unit and sat-
er.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT

Check satellite radio tuner power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-392, "SATELLITE RADIO TUNER :
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CONTINUITY COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT AND REQUEST SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M153 and satellite radio
tuner connector B111.
M153 (A) and satellite radio tuner harness connector B111 (B).
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminals Connector Terminals
28 28
M153 29 B111 29 Yes AWNIA2034ZZ
30 30
4. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector M153 (A) and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminals

28
A
M153 29 Ground No
30
Is the inspection result normal? B
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AV CONTROL UNIT VOLTAGE C
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M153 D
and ground.
(+) Voltage
E
Connector Terminals (−) (Approx.)
28
M153 Ground 7.0V F
29
ALNIA1179ZZ
YES >> GO TO 4. G
4.CHECK SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
H
2. Disconnect AV control unit connector.
3. Connect satellite radio tuner.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. I
5. Check voltage between satellite radio tuner harness connector
terminal ground.
J
(+) Voltage
Connector Terminal (−) (Approx.)
B111 30 Ground 7.0V K

ALNIA1180ZZ

YES >> Inspection End. L
AV

U1300 is indicated when a communication signal malfunction occurs. U1300 is indicated along with DTCs that
identify components connected to the AV control unit through communication lines. Determine the possible
malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM
Display contents of
CONSULT
• A/C and AV switch assembly power supply and ground • A/C and AV switch assembly power
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
circuits are malfunctioning. supply and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit and • AV communication circuits be-
U1240 • SWITCH CONN
A/C and AV switch assembly are malfunctioning. tween AV control unit and A/C and
[U1240]
• AV communication signal between AV control unit and AV switch assembly.
A/C and AV switch assembly is malfunctioning.

A

AV CONTROL UNIT
parking brake).

F
Display contents of
DTC DTC Detection Condition Action to take
CONSULT G
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-
U1310
[U1310] circuit. 481, "Removal and Installation".
H
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
Navigation System".
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses of the AV control unit are not blown.

19 Battery power 24
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery
7 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
M152
19 Ground
Battery
voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
terminals.
AWNIA1581ZZ

2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector A
and ground.

B
M152 20 Ground Yes
Are the inspection results OK?
NO >> Repair AV control unit ground.
AWNIA1930ZZ
DISPLAY UNIT D
Navigation System". F
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

and ground.
H
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
I
2
M141 Ground 9V
3
Does specified voltage exist? J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. ALNIA0317GB
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT K

2. Disconnect the display unit connector M141 and the AV control
L
unit connector M154.
3. Check continuity between the display unit harness connector
M141 (A) and the AV control unit connector M154 (B).
M
A B
Continuity
AV
2 59
M141 M154 Yes
3 47 ALNIA0318GB
4. Check continuity between the display unit harness connector M141 (A) and ground. O
A
— Continuity P
Connector Terminal
2
M141 Ground No
3
YES >> Check AV control unit power and ground supply. Refer to AV-388, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagno-
sis Procedure".

2. Disconnect display unit connector.
ground.

M141 1 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair harness or connector. ALNIA0319GB

A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471344
Navigation System".
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the fuse of the AC and AV switch assembly is not blown.

A/C and AV switch assembly 3 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
Is the fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98.
2. Check voltage between the A/C and AV switch assembly con-
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery
M98 3 Ground 0V
voltage voltage

terminals.

2. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly harness A

B
M98 1 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair harness or ground.
ALNIA0316GB
BOSE SPEAKER AMP D
1.CHECK FUSE G
Check that the BOSE speaker amp. fuse is not blown.
Unit Terminal Signal name Fuse No. H

11 26
10 25
I
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector. K
B110 terminal 10, 11 and ground.
L
(+)
Connector Terminal
10 M
11
AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between BOSE speaker amp. and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT O

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector.
tor B110 terminal 7,12 and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
7
B110 Ground Yes
12
Does continuity exist? AWNIA1720ZZ

Navigation System".
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuses of the satellite radio tuner (factory installed) are not blown.
Satellite radio tuner (factory in- 32 Battery power 24

stalled) 36 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
B111.
3. Check voltage between the satellite radio tuner (factory
installed) and ground.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
32
B111 Ground WKIA4539E
Battery Battery
36 0V
voltage voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.

2. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) A
harness connector and ground.

B
B111 35 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness or
connector. AWNIA1721ZZ
REAR VIEW CAMERA D
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA SIDE) G

H
T101 and ground.
(+) Transmission
(-) Value (Approx.) I

Is voltage reading approximately 6 volts? J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY) K
3. Check continuity between rear view camera harness connector L
T101 (A) terminal 1 and AV control unit harness connector M155
(B) terminal 70.
M
A B
Continuity
T101 1 M155 70 Yes
AV

O
A
— Continuity
T101 1 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.
(+) Transmission
(-) Value (Approx.)


T101 2 Ground Yes

Navigation System".
1.CHECK FUSE

Battery 24
YES >> GO TO 2.
B131 and ground.
(+) Ignition switch

(-) Value (Approx.)
1 OFF
3 ON
Is battery voltage present as specified? ALNIA0323GB

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between Bluetooth® control unit and fuse. A
B
2. Disconnect Bluetooth® control unit connector.
nector B131 and ground.
C
Connector. Terminal — Continuity
B131 4 Ground Yes
D
E
MICROPHONE
F
Navigation System". G
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (MICROPHONE SIDE) H

minal 4 and ground. I
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
R7 4 Ground 5V
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. WKIA5796E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (CONTINUITY) L

2. Disconnect microphone and Bluetooth® control unit harness
connectors. M
B131 (B) terminal 29. AV
A B
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
4. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7 (A) terminal 4 and ground. P
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT SIDE)
1. Connect Bluetooth® control unit harness connector.
3. Check voltage between Bluetooth® control unit harness connec-
tor B131 terminal 29 and ground.
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B131 29 Ground 5V
ALNIA0321GB
YES >> Go to 4.
NO >> Replace Bluetooth® control unit. Refer to AV-503,
2. Disconnect microphone harness connector R7 and Bluetooth®
control unit harness connector B131.
A B
Continuity


A
C
Navigation System".
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 40.
G
A B
Continuity
M141 17 M154 40 Yes ALNIA0382GB
H
I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
M141 17 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK RGB (R: RED) SIGNAL
nector M154.
(+) AV
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0383GB
Receive
nal P
SKIB2238J


Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB signal to the display unit.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 39.
A B
Continuity

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 6 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB (G: GREEN) SIGNAL
nector M154.
minal 6 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0385GB
Receive
nal
SKIB2236J


A
C
Navigation System".
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 38.
G
A B
Continuity
M141 18 M154 38 Yes ALNIA0386GB
H
I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
M141 18 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2. K
2.CHECK RGB (B: BLUE) SIGNAL
nector M154.
(+) AV
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0387GB
Receive
nal P
SKIB2237J


Transmit the RGB synchronizing signal to the display unit so as to synchronize the RGB image displayed with
AV control unit.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 41.
A B
Continuity
M141 19 M154 41 Yes ALNIA0388GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 19 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL
nector M154.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0389GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3603E


A
Transmits the display area of RGB image displayed by AV control unit with RGB area (YS) signal to display B
unit.
Navigation System". D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB AREA (YS) SIGNAL CIRCUIT E

nector M154. F
terminal 43.
G
A B
Continuity
H

(A) terminal 9 and ground. I
A
— Continuity
M141 9 Ground No
Are continuity results as specified? K
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL L
nector M154.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. M
minal 9 and ground.
AV
(+)
Connector Terminal
O
ALNIA0391GB
Receive
M141 9 Ground audio sig- P
nal
PKIB4948J


played with AV control unit such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 45.
A B
Continuity

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 8 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONIZING (HP) SIGNAL
nector M154.
minal 8 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0396GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3601E


A
AV

played with AV control unit, such as the image quality adjusting menu, etc.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M154.
terminal 57.
A B
Continuity
M141 20 M154 57 Yes ALNIA0392GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M141 20 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL
nector M154.
(+)
Connector Terminal
ALNIA0393GB
Receive
nal
SKIB3598E


A
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the
audio signals before sending them to the front door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
Navigation System".
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp. and speaker connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
speaker connector.
tor B109 (A) and suspect speaker harness connector (B).
A B Continuity
18 1
D3
19 2
B109 Yes
31 1
D103
32 2
A
B Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
19
B109 Ground No
31 AWNIA1694ZZ
32
YES >> GO TO 3.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
speaker connector. A
B

Condition C
tor (+) (-) signal
18 19
D
Receive
B109 audio sig-
31 32 nal E
SKIA0177E
F
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M157 and BOSE speaker H
amp. connector B109.
M157 (A) and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 (B). I
A B
Continuity
113 35
119 36
M157 B109 Yes K
109 33
115 34
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
113
AV
119
M157 Ground No
109 AWNIA1761ZZ
115 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect AV control unit connector and BOSE speaker amp.
connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
113 119
Receive
M157 audio sig-
109 115 nal
SKIA0177E


TWEETER
TWEETER
A
The AV control unit sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the B
audio signals before sending them to the tweeters using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK E
• Damage F
YES >> GO TO 2 G
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B110 and suspect H
tweeter connector.
tor B110 (A) and suspect tweeter harness connector (B). I
A B
Continuity
1 1
M51
2 2
B110 Yes K
4 1
M52
3 2
3. Check continuity between BOSE speaker amp. harness connec- L
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
AV
2
B110 Ground No
4 AWNIA1697ZZ
3 O
YES >> GO TO 3.

TWEETER
tweeter connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
1 2
Receive
B110 audio sig-
4 3 nal
SKIA0177E

and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4.
AWNIA1698ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M157 and BOSE speaker
M157 (A) and BOSE speaker amp. harness connector B109 (B).
A B
Continuity
113 35
119 36
M157 B109 Yes
109 33
115 34
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
113
119
M157 Ground No
109 AWNIA1761ZZ
115
YES >> GO TO 5.

TWEETER
connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
113 119
D
Receive
M157 audio sig-
109 115 nal E
SKIA0177E

NO >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-481, "Removal and G
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
audio signals before sending them to the center speaker using the audio signal circuits.
Navigation System".
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center
speaker connector M130.
tor B109 (A) and center speaker harness connector M130 (B).
A B
Continuity
29 1
B109 M130 Yes
30 2
AWNIA1699ZZ
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
29
B109 Ground No
30
YES >> GO TO 3.

CENTER SPEAKER
speaker connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
AWNIA1700ZZ
D
Receive
nal E
SKIA0177E
Is the audio signal voltage reading as specified? F

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.HARNESS CHECK G

H
I
A B
Continuity
113 35 J
119 36
M157 B109 Yes
109 33
115 34 K

L
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal M
113
119
M157 Ground No
109 AWNIA1761ZZ
AV
115
Are continuity test results as specified? O
YES >> GO TO 5.
P

CENTER SPEAKER
connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
113 119
Receive
M157 audio sig-
109 115 nal
SKIA0177E


REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
audio signals before sending them to the rear door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
1.CONNECTOR CHECK E
• Damage F
YES >> GO TO 2 G
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B109, B110 and H
tors B109 (A) and B110 (B) and suspect speaker harness con- I
nector (C).
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Continuity J

15 2
A: B109 C: D202
28 1
Yes K
9 2
B: B110 C: D302
14 1
Connector Terminal - Continuity M

15
A: B109
28
Ground No AV
9
B: B110
14
AWNIA1702ZZ
Are the continuity test results as specified? O

YES >> GO TO 3.
P

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
connector.
scope.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
A: B109 28 15
Receive
audio sig-
B: B110 14 9 nal
SKIA0177E

and Installation".
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
112 24
118 23
M157 B109 Yes
108 26
114 25
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
112
118
M157 Ground No
108 AWNIA1762ZZ
114
YES >> GO TO 5.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
1. Connect AV control unit connector M157 and BOSE speaker
amp. connector B109. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
112 118
D
Receive
M157 audio sig-
108 114 nal E
SKIA0177E
Is the audio signal voltage reading as specified? F

AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
audio signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
Navigation System".
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
rear subwoofer connector.
tor B110 (A) and suspect rear subwoofer harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
13 1
B106
8 2
B110 Yes
5 1
B107
6 2
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
8
B110 Ground No
5 AWNIA1705ZZ
6
YES >> GO TO 3.

SUBWOOFER
subwoofer connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
13 8
D
Receive au-
B110
5 6 dio signal
E
SKIA0177E

NO >> GO TO 4. G
AWNIA1706ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
112 24
118 23
M157 B109 Yes K
108 26
114 25
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
112
AV
118
M157 Ground No
108 AWNIA1762ZZ
114 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

SUBWOOFER
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
112 118
Receive
M157 audio sig-
108 114 nal
SKIA0177E


A
When the audio system is turned on, a voltage signal is supplied from the AV control unit to the BOSE speaker B
1.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP) E

B109 terminal 20 and ground. F
(+)
Connector Terminal G
H
NO >> GO TO 2.
AWNIA1707ZZ
2.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT) I

Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M157 ter-
J
(+)
Connector Terminal
K
YES >> Repair harness or connector. L
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in the steering wheel audio
Navigation System".

1. Disconnect steering switch connector M88.
Resistance
(Approx.)

AWNIA0035ZZ
17
15
Do the steering switches check OK?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH(SPIRAL CABLE) AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M152.
2. Check continuity between AV control unit harness connector M152 and combination switch(spiral cable)
harness connector M30.

6 24
M152 16 M30 31 Yes
15 33
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M152 and ground.

6
M152 16 Ground No
15
YES >> GO TO 3.

STEERING SWITCH
3.COMBINATION SWITCH(SPIRAL CABLE) CHECK A

1. Disconnect combination switch(spiral cable) connector M88.
2. Check continuity between combination switch(spiral cable) har-
B
A B
Continuity
24 14
M30 31 M88 15 Yes
33 17
D
Does the combination switch(spiral cable) check OK? ALNIA0931GB
YES >> Inspection End. E

NO >> Replace combination switch(spiral cable). Refer to SR-15, "Removal and Installation".
AV

Communication signals are exchanged between the AV control unit and satellite radio tuner using the commu-
nication circuits.
Navigation System".
1.CHECK HARNESS - 1
A B
Continuity
B111 28 M153 28 Yes ALNIA0334GB

A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B111 28 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HARNESS - 2
A B
Continuity
B111 29 M153 29 Yes
ALNIA0657GB
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
B111 29 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.

3.CHECK HARNESS - 3 A
B
A B
Continuity
B111 30 M153 30 Yes
harness connector B111 (A) terminal 30 and ground. D
ALNIA0658GB
A
— Continuity E
Connector Terminal
B111 30 Ground No
Are continuity results as specified? F
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK REQ1 SIGNAL G
1. Connect satellite radio tuner (factory installed) connector and AV control unit connector.
3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) har- H
ness connector B111 terminal 28 and ground with CONSULT or
oscilloscope.
I
(+)
Connector Terminal
J

K
L
SKIB3825E

YES >> GO TO 5. M
5.CHECK TXD SIGNAL
Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) harness AV
scope.
O
(+)
Connector Terminal
P
SKIB3824E

YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK RXD SIGNAL
scope.
(+)
Connector Terminal
SKIB3826E

YES >> Replace satellite radio tuner. Refer to AV-494, "Removal and Installation".

A
B
Left and right channel audio signals are supplied from the satellite radio tuner to the AV control unit through
the sound signal circuits.
C
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-449, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio system Without D
Navigation System".
E
LEFT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
F
3. Check continuity between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) G
connector B111 (A) and AV control unit connector M153 (B).
A B H
Continuity
21 21
B111 M153 Yes I
22 22 ALNIA0337GB
J
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
K
21
B111 Ground No
22
Are continuity results as specified? L
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL M

3. Check signal between satellite radio tuner (factory installed) AV
scope.
O
Connector Terminal
P
B111 22 21
ALNIA0880GB
SKIB3609E

RIGHT CHANNEL
1.CHECK HARNESS
B111 (A) and AV control unit M153 (B).
A B
Continuity
23 23
B111 M153 Yes
24 24 ALNIA0338GB
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
23
B111 Ground No
24
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO SIGNAL
scope.

Connector Terminal
B111 24 23
ALNIA0881GB
SKIB3609E


A
Voice signals are transmitted from the microphone to the Bluetooth® control unit using the microphone signal B
circuits.
C
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE E

connector. F
G
A B
Continuity
H
7 1
WKIA5795E
B131 8 R7 2 Yes
29 4 I
®
4. Check continuity between Bluetooth control unit harness connector B131 (A) and ground.
J
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
7 K
B131 8 Ground No
29
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
M
nector. AV
minal 4 and ground. O
(+)
R7 4 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
B131 terminals 7 and 8.
(+) (-)
Connector Reference signal
Terminal Terminal
PKIB5037J

NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-501, "Removal and Installation".

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A

AV CONTROL UNIT
B

CONSULT data monitor item C
Dis-
play
ON Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor- D
VHCL SPD SIG
OFF Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) mal.
ON Parking brake is applied. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-

PKB SIG E
OFF Parking brake is released. mal.

ON light optical sensor when the light SW
is ON . F
ILLUM SIG —
ON. G
IGN SIG —
H
Changes in indication may be delayed. This is nor-
OFF mal.
than R
I
TERMINAL LAYOUT
L
AWNIA1971ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES M
Terminal
Description
Condition AV
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Depress volume DOWN
switch.
0.7V O
6 15 Depress volume UP switch. 1.3V
Steering switch signal A Input ON
(W/G) (L/B)
Depress switch. 2.0V P
Ignition
7
(V/Y)
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF. 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
(R/L) Lighting switch is ON. Battery voltage

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Depress SOURCE switch. 0V

16 15 1.3V
Steering switch signal B Input ON Depress switch.
(GR/L) (L/B)

Ignition
19
(Y/R)
OFF
Ignition
20
(B)
ON
22 21 Ignition
Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
(Y/L) (W/L) Input switch
LH is selected
*1 *1 ON
SKIB3609E
24 23 Ignition
Satellite radio sound signal When satellite radio mode
(BR/L) (Y/G) Input switch
RH is selected
*1 *1 ON
SKIB3609E
28 Ignition
Request signal When satellite radio mode
(R) Ground Input switch
(SAT→CONT) is selected
*1 ON
SKIA9299J
29 Ignition
Communication signal When satellite radio mode
(B) Ground Input switch
(SAT→CONT) is selected
*1 ON
SKIA9300J
30 Ignition
Communication signal When satellite radio mode
(G) Ground Output switch
(CONT→SAT) is selected
*1 ON
SKIA9301J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
34 B
— Antenna main — — — —
(B)
35
— Antenna power — — — —
(B) C
Ignition D
36 When AUX mode is select-
Ground AUX image signal Output switch
(W) ed
ON
E
SKIB2251J
Ignition
37
Ground AUX image ground — switch — 0V F
(B)
ON
Start confirmation/adjust- G
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Output switch
ON H
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J
I
Ignition
39 play color bar by selecting J
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Output switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2236J K
ment mode, and then dis- L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Output switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
M
SKIB2238J
AV
Ignition
41
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Output switch —
(G)
ON O
SKIB3603E
P
Ignition
42 — RGB synchronizing ground — switch — 0V
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
RGB image 5V
Ignition
43
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Output switch
(B) AUX image
ON
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
(R) (HP) signal
ON
SKIB3601E
46 Ignition
Ground Signal ground — — 0V
(LG) switch
Ignition
47
Ground Signal VCC Output switch — 9V
(O)
ACC
49 — Shield — — — —
50 — Shield — — — —
55 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
(W) signal
On
SKIB3598E
Ignition
58
(BR)
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition B
59
Ground Inverter VCC Output switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC
C
Ignition
65 Rear view camera video in
(W)
Ground
(+)
Input switch With rear view camera ON D
ON
SKIB2251J E
Ignition F
66 74
Aux image signal Input switch When aux mode is selected
(LG) (V)
ON
G
SKIB2251J
Ignition
70 Shift selector is in R posi- H
Ground RV_CAM_SIG Output switch 6V
(L) tion
ACC
71
Ground RV_CAM_GND — — — —
(V/G) I
72 — Shield — — — —
73 — Shield — — — —
J
ment mode, and then Voice
Ignition
80 79
TEL voice audio signal Input switch
Microphone Test by select- K
(BR) (Y) ing “Voice Microphone
ON
Test” on Handsfree Micro-
phone screen.
SKIB3609E
L
81 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
85 M
(BR)
ON
86 Input/
— CAN–H — — — AV
(L) Output
87 Input/
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
88 AV communication signal 1 Input/ O
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(P) (L) Output P
— — — —
(R) (H) Output
— — — —
(G) (L) Output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
AUX audio signal RH Input switch
(B) (R) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
AUX audio signal LH Input switch
(W) (R) ed
ON
SKIB3609E
103 Pressing the eject switch 0V

Ground CD eject signal Input —
(SB) Except for above 3.3V
Ignition
104
(G)
ON
Ignition R position Battery voltage
105
ON
Ignition Parking brake ON 0V
106
(G/R) Parking brake OFF Battery voltage
ON
Ignition
107 Vehicle speed signal When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(V/W) (8-pulse) prox. 25 MPH (40 km/h)
ON
SKIA6649J
Ignition
108 114 Rear RH pre-amp. sound
Output switch Audio output
(V) (LG) signal
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
109 115 Front RH pre-amp. sound
(B) (W) signal
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
110
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch Battery voltage
(B/P)
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
112 118 Rear LH pre-amp. sound C
(W/R) (W/L) signal
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
113 119 Front LH pre-amp. sound
(G) (R) signal
ON
F
SKIB3609E
120
— USB ground — — — — G
(B)
121
— USB D- — — — —
(W)
H
122
(R)
123
— USB D+ — — — — I
(G)
*1 With satellite radio
DTC Index INFOID:0000000009471385 J
Self-diagnosis results display item

K
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-364, "DTC Logic" L
M
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-367, "DTC Logic"
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-368, "DTC Logic"
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-369, "DTC Logic" AV
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-371, "DTC Logic"
O
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-372, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1225 USB CONTROLLER [U1225] AV-374, "DTC Logic" P
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV-376, "DTC Logic"
U1229 iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229] AV-377, "DTC Logic"

AV CONTROL UNIT
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-380, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-381, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1255 SATELLITE TUNER [U1255] AV-384, "Description"

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
AWNIA1727ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
Ignition
1
(B) H
ON
Ignition
2
Ground Inverter VCC Input switch — 9V
(Y)
ACC I
Ignition
3
Ground Signal VCC Input switch — 9V
(O)
ACC J
Ignition
4
(B)
ON
K
5 — Shield — — — —
Start confirmation/adjust- L
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (G: green) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS M
screen.
SKIB2236J
7 — Shield — — — — AV
Ignition
O
(R) (HP) signal
ON
P
SKIB3601E

DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
At RGB image displayed 5V
Ignition
9
Ground RGB area (YS) signal Input switch At rear view camera image
(B)
ON displayed
PKIB4948J
Ignition
Ground Input switch
ON
PKIB5039J
Ignition
13
(BR)
ON
Ignition
14
Ground Signal ground — switch — 0V
(LG)
ON
Ignition
15 When AUX mode is select-
Ground AUX image signal Input switch
(W) ed
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (R: red) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2238J
Ignition
Ground RGB signal (B: blue) Input switch
ON
DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS
screen.
SKIB2237J

DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
19 C
Ground RGB synchronizing signal Input switch —
(G)
ON
SKIB3603E D
E
Ignition
(W) signal
On
F
SKIB3598E
21 — Shield — — — —
G
22 Communication signal
Ignition
When adjusting display H
ON
I
PKIB5039J
23 — Shield — — — —
J
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
TERMINAL LAYOUT
ALNIA1165ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
1 2
Audio signal tweeter LH Output switch Audio output
(LG) (V)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 3
Audio signal tweeter RH Output switch Audio output
(G) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
5 6
Audio signal subwoofer RH Output switch Audio output
(R) (BR)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
ON
Ignition
10
(SB)
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
13 8 C
Audio signal subwoofer LH Output switch Audio output
(L) (P)
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
14 9
Audio signal rear door RH Output switch Audio input
(LG) (O)
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
18 19
Audio signal rear door RH Output switch Audio input
(W) (B)
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
Ignition
20
(SB)
ACC
J
Ignition
24 23 K
Audio signal rear LH Input switch Audio input
(GR) (L)
ON
L
SKIB3609E
M
Ignition
26 25
Audio signal rear RH Input switch Audio input
(BR) (L)
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 15
Audio signal rear door LH Output switch Audio output P
(G) (L)
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
29 30 Audio signal center speak-
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
33 34
Audio signal front RH Input switch Audio input
(LG) (V)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
35 36
Audio signal front LH Input switch Audio input
(W) (B)
ON
SKIB3609E

A
ALNIA1166ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Reference value
Input/ Condition
Output
G
Ignition H
Output switch
(W) (BR) LH mode is selected
ON
I
SKIB3609E
J
Ignition
Output switch
(B) (Y) RH mode is selected
ON K
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 Request signal When satellite radio M
(R) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON
SKIA9299J
AV
O
Ignition
(V) (SAT→CONT) mode is selected
ON
P
SKIA9300J

Reference value
Input/ Condition
Output
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(L) (CONT→SAT) mode is selected
ON
SKIA9301J
Ignition
32
(P)
OFF
35
— Shield — — — —
(B)
Ignition
36
(GR)
ACC

A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
ALNIA0662ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal F
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
output G
1
(V)
Ignition H
2
Ground ACC power Input switch – Battery voltage
(GR)
ACC/ON
Ignition I
3 switch
(O) ON/
START
J
Ignition
4
(B)
ON
7 K
8 MIC in signal Input – – –
(L)
9 10
Ignition Bluetooth® control
Audio out Output switch unit sends audio
(BR) (Y)
ACC/ON signal M
SKIB3609E
AV
Ignition When vehicle

28
Ground
Vehicle speed sig-
Input switch speed is approx.
O
(BR) nal (8-pulse)
ON 40 km/h (25 MPH)
PKIA1935E
P
Ignition
29
Ground Microphone power Output switch – 5V
(R)
ON
33
(B) na

Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
output
34
(B) na
35
– M-CAN1 (+) – – – —
(L)
36
– M-CAN1 (-) – – – —
(P)
37 – Shield – – – —
40
– M-CAN2 (-) – – – —
(R)
42
– M-CAN2 (-) – – – —
(G)

COLOR DISPLAY
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
WIRING DIAGRAM A
COLOR DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram - With BOSE Audio system Without Navigation System INFOID:0000000009471390
B
AV
ABNWA1941GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA1519GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1943GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA1521GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1953GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA0534GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5137GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AANIA0703GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5138GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5139GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5140GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5141GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5142GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5143GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA3775GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA1635GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA1636GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5193GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5144GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5145GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5146GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5194GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5147GB

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM

The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-481, "Removal and Installa-
tion".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
BOSE Audio system Without Navigation
System". B
• AV control unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction.
Refer to AV-388, "AV CONTROL UNIT :
No sound from all speakers. Diagnosis Procedure". C
• BOSE speaker amp. power supply and
: Diagnosis Procedure". D
• BOSE speaker amp. on signal circuit
malfunction.
E
AV control unit and BOSE speaker amp.
Refer to AV-406, "Diagnosis Procedure" F
(tweeter).
Refer to AV-412, "Diagnosis Procedure" G
(center speaker).
H
No sound comes out or the level of the (subwoofer).
sound is low. • Sound signal circuit malfunction between
BOSE speaker amp. and speaker I
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker (tweeter). J
tweeter RH, center speaker, rear door (center speaker).
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear Refer to AV-415, "Diagnosis Procedure"
subwoofer LH, rear subwoofer RH) does (rear door speaker). K
not output sound. Refer to AV-418, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(subwoofer).
Refer to AV-490, "Removal and Installa- L
tion" (tweeter).
M
tion" (rear door speaker). AV
tion" (subwoofer).
Refer to AV-481, "Removal and Installa- O
tion".
tion". P

AUDIO SYSTEM
tion".
tion".
AV control unit and BOSE speaker amp.
(tweeter).
(center speaker).
(subwoofer).
BOSE speaker amp. and speaker
Noise comes out only from a certain speak- (tweeter).
Noise is mixed with audio. er (front door speaker LH, front door speak- Refer to AV-412, "Diagnosis Procedure"
er RH, tweeter LH, tweeter RH, center (center speaker).
speaker, rear door speaker LH, rear door Refer to AV-415, "Diagnosis Procedure"
speaker RH, rear subwoofer LH, rear sub- (rear door speaker).
woofer RH). Refer to AV-418, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(subwoofer).
tion" (tweeter).
tion" (subwoofer).
tion".
tion".

AUDIO SYSTEM
A
• Malfunction in antenna, antenna feeder
There is malfunction in the CONSULT self or AV control unit.
diagnosis result. • Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-359, "CONSULT Function • Poor connector connection of antenna or B
(MULTI AV)". antenna feeder.
No satellite radio reception.
• Poor continuity in antenna feeder.
There is no malfunction in the CONSULT • Poor connector connection of antenna or
C
self diagnosis result. antenna feeder.
Refer to AV-359, "CONSULT Function • Loose satellite radio antenna mounting
(MULTI AV)". nut. D
Buzz/rattle sound from speaker BLE DIAGNOSIS" in the appropriate interi- E
or trim section.

F
the vehicle.
a compatible type. This can be confirmed by changing the cellular phone to another compatible type, and G
Check Compatibility H

I
NOTE:
NOTE: J
4. Go to “www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/”. K
L
any further action.
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function, they will need to get an approved M
Perform diagnosis as per the following table. AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
play at the guide).
®
®
Replace Bluetooth control unit. Refer to
established.
formed, however, voice between each • Malfunction in AV control unit. Replace
other cannot be heard during the conver- AV control unit. Refer to AV-481, "Re-
sation. moval and Installation".
not work.


A
etc.).
NOISE
D
The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
F
G
H
A cracking or snapping sound occurs with the op- • Relay malfunction, AV control unit malfunc-
Noise only occurs when various eration of various switches. tion
I
ing. • Motor

AV
lowing conditions:
NOTE: P

call.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
ual.
WARNING: E
F
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
K
L
AV
- Oily dirt: O
area.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
(TechMate No.)
Tool name
(J-46534)
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ

PIIB1407E

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/ BOSE]

AV CONTROL UNIT
B
AWNIA1926ZZ K
1. AV control unit 2. AV control unit bracket (LH) 3. AV control unit bracket (RH)
4. A/C auto amp. 5. Cluster lid C (with A/C and AV switch Clip L
assembly attached)
AV CONTROL UNIT
M
Removal
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform "READ CONFIGURATION" to save current vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to AV-337, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair AV
Requirement".
2. Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-18, "Removal and Installation". O
3. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".

AV CONTROL UNIT
4. Remove the av control unit screws (A), then pull out the av con-
trol unit (1), disconnect the av control unit connectors and
remove the av control unit (1).
ALNIA1131ZZ
Installation
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, perform "WRITE CONFIGURATION". Refer to AV-337, "ADDITIONAL
Removal
ALNIA1215ZZ
Installation

A
REMOVAL B
2. Remove the four multifunction switch screws (A) and the multi-
function switch (2) from cluster lid D (1). C
: Metal clip
AWNIA1917ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AWNIA1928ZZ
1. Audio display unit bracket 2. Audio display unit 3. Cluster lid D

Metal Clip
REMOVAL
2. Remove the audio display unit bracket screws (A).
and bracket assembly (1) and remove.
ALNIA1139ZZ

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
5. Remove the audio display unit screws on the sides and the audio display unit from the audio display unit
brackets. A
INSTALLATION
B
AV

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
REMOVAL
2. Release the pawl from the back of the center console to remove
the USB interface (1).
ALNIA1401ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUX IN JACK
AUX IN JACK
A
REMOVAL B
2. Remove the auxiliary input jacks screws (A) and auxiliary input
jack (1). C
ALNIA1162ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
REMOVAL
AWNIA2220ZZ
INSTALLATION

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
AWNIA2221ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
(1) and remove.
the front door speaker spacer (2).
ALNIA1133ZZ
INSTALLATION

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
ALNIA1135ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
ALNIA1134ZZ

REMOVAL
INSTALLATION

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
A
G
ALNIA1137ZZ

H
REMOVAL
NOTE:
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the BOSE speaker amp. and remove.
INSTALLATION K
AV

REMOVAL
5. Remove the satellite radio tuner unit screws (A), disconnect the
harness connectors (B) from the satellite radio tuner (1) and
remove.
ALNIA1153ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
antenna. C
antenna (1).
D
ALNIA1141ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
REMOVAL
(B).
ALNIA1132ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
A
AWNIA1765ZZ
I
7. Satellite radio antenna J
K
ELEMENT CHECK
each side. L
AV
SEL250I
O
P
SEL122R

AUDIO ANTENNA
SEL252I

SEL253I
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
drawing pen.
NOTE:
PIIA0215E

AUDIO ANTENNA
B
SEL012D
D
hot air outlet.
hours.
F
G
SEL013D
AV

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
REMOVAL
(1).
ALNIA0043ZZ
INSTALLATION

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
A
REMOVAL B
C
ALNIA0928ZZ
F
G
I
ALNIA0929ZZ

(1).
ALNIA0930ZZ M
INSTALLATION
AV

TEL ANTENNA
TEL ANTENNA
REMOVAL
ALNIA1144ZZ
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
C
D
6. Disconnect the harness connector (B) from the Bluetooth control
unit and remove.
E
ALNIA1154ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
AV

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
REMOVAL
ALNIA1156ZZ
INSTALLATION
REAR VIEW CAMERA

CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".

< BASIC INSPECTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
BASIC INSPECTION A
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
AWNIA2486GB M
DETAILED FLOW AV
1.CHECK SYMPTOM
Check the malfunction symptoms by performing the following items. O
tion occurred).
P
>> GO TO 2.
NOTE:
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
NOTE:
Start with the diagnosis for the CAN communication system if “CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000] or CONTROL
>> GO TO 5.
Perform the relevant diagnosis referring to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to AV-635, "Symptom
Table".
>> GO TO 5.
NOTE:
>> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK AFTER REPAIR
parts.
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.FINAL CHECK
are present.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Inspection End.

A
INFOID:0000000009471420 B
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing AV control unit, save current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before C
replacement.
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION: D
When replacing AV control unit, you must perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur. E
F

G
NOTE: H
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection”.
I
>> GO TO 2.
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and Installation". J
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION K
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write L
vehicle specification. Refer to AV-508, "CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Special Repair Require-
ment".
M
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
Check that the operation of the AV control unit and camera images (fixed guide lines and predictive course AV
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END O

CONFIGURATION (AV CONTROL UNIT) : Description INFOID:0000000009471422 P
• Configuration has three functions as follows.

READ CONFIGURATION
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION

Select “CONFIGURATION” of AV control unit.

When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
>> WORK END

Select “WRITE CONFIGURATION-Manual selection” to write vehicle specifications into the AV control unit.
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
lines) are normal.
>> WORK END

CAUTION:
MANUAL SETTING ITEM

Note
Items Setting value
LHD —
STEERING
RHD —
MODE 1 BASE
GRADE
MODE 2 OTHER
NORMAL —
ENGINE TYPE
HYBRID —
NORMAL NORMAL
BODY TYPE
CONV CONVERTIBLE
REAR + SIDE REAR + SIDE CAMERA

MANUAL SETTING ITEM
Note A
Items Setting value
WITHOUT —
4WAS
WITH — B
BASE —
SOUND SYSTEM
BOSE —
ROD TYPE — C
ANTENNA TYPE
LONG TYPE —
WITHOUT —
DUAL-ZONE AUTO TEMP D
WITH —
WITHOUT —
DVD PLAY FUNCTION
WITH — E
F
H/B 2DR H/B 2 DOOR
H/B 4DR H/B 4 DOOR G
COUPE T COUPE T BAR
H
H/T 2DR 2 H/T 2 DOOR (HIGHROOF) I
BODY TYPE
WGN 2DR WAGON 2 DOOR
J

K
VAN 2DR VAN 2 DOOR
VAN 4DR 1 VAN 4 DOOR L
CONV CONVERTIBLE
M
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUDIO SYSTEM
AWNIA2699GB
AUDIO SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
• AV control unit A
• Display unit
• Window antenna
B
• Tweeters C
• Center speaker
• Rear subwoofers D
sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp. The BOSE speaker amp. amplifies the audio signals before
sending them to the front door speakers, tweeters, center speaker, rear door speakers and the rear subwoof-
ers. E
SATELLITE RADIO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The satellite radio system consists of the following components F
• Satellite antenna
• AV control unit
When the satellite radio system is on, radio signals are supplied to the AV control unit from the satellite G
antenna. The AV control unit then sends audio signals to the BOSE speaker amp.
SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM H
I
AV

AUDIO SYSTEM
AWNIA3228ZZ

4. AV control unit M160, M161, M162, 5. Display unit M142, M151 6. A/C and AV switch assembly M98
M163, M164, M165, M166, M167,
M168 (located behind A/C and AV
switch assembly)

AUDIO SYSTEM
7. Steering angle sensor M53 [located 8. Steering wheel audio control switch- 9. USB interface M211(view in center
10. Aux in jack M209 11. Microphone R7 12. Rear view camera T101
13. Front door speaker 14. Rear door speaker 15. Rear subwoofers (view under rear B
LH D3 LH D202 parcel shelf)
RH D103 RH D302 LH B106
RH B107
16. BOSE speaker amp B109, B110 C

Controls audio system, USB connection, AUX IN connection, NAVI functions E
AV control unit
and satellite radio system functions.
Display unit Displays all audio and climate control related information.
Receives power (amp ON) and audio signals from AV control unit and out- F
BOSE speaker amp.
puts audio signals to each speaker.
• Audio operation can be operated.
• Steering switch signal is output to AV control unit.
G
Front door speakers
• Outputs audio signal from BOSE speaker amp. H
Tweeters
Center speaker
I
Rear door speakers
Rear subwoofers J
Satellite antenna (if so equipped) Audio signal (satellite radio) is received and output to AV control unit.
AV

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ALNIA0424GB
NOTE:
Refer to NAVI System Owner's Manual for system operation.
The navigation system periodically calculates the vehicle's current position according to the following three
signals: Travel distance of the vehicle as determined by the vehicle speed sensor, turning angle of the vehicle
as determined by the gyroscope (angular velocity sensor), and the direction of vehicle travel as determined by
the GPS antenna (GPS information).
The current position of the vehicle is then identified by comparing the calculated vehicle position with map data
read from the map data, which is stored in the hard disk drive (HDD) (map-matching), and indicated on the
screen with a current-location mark.
By comparing the vehicle position detection results found by the

GPS and by map-matching, more accurate vehicle position data can
be used.
The current vehicle position will be calculated by detecting the dis-
tance the vehicle moved from the previous calculation point and its
direction.
SEL684V
TRAVEL DISTANCE
Travel distance calculations are based on the vehicle speed input signal. Therefore, the calculation may
become incorrect as the tires wear down. To prevent this, an automatic distance fine adjustment function has
been adopted.
TRAVEL DIRECTION
Change in the travel direction of the vehicle is calculated by a gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) and a GPS
antenna (GPS information). As the gyroscope and GPS antenna have both merit and demerit, input signals
from them are prioritized in each situation. However, this order of priority may change in accordance with more
detailed travel conditions so that the travel direction is detected more accurately.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Type Advantage Disadvantage A

• Direction errors may accumulate when the ve-
• Can detect the vehicle's turning angle quite
Gyroscope (angular velocity sensor) hicle is driven for long distances without stop-
accurately.
ping. B
• Can detect the vehicle's travel direction • Correct direction cannot be detected when the
GPS antenna (GPS information)
(North/South/East/West). vehicle speed is low.
MAP–MATCHING C
Map–matching is a function that repositions the vehicle on the road
map when a new location is judged to be the most accurate. This is
done by comparing the current vehicle position, calculated by the D
method described in the position detection principle, with the road
map data around the vehicle, read from the map data stored on the
HDD. E
Therefore, the vehicle position may not be corrected after the vehicle
is driven over a certain distance or time in which GPS information is
hard to receive. In this case, the current-location mark on the display
must be corrected manually. F
CAUTION:
SEL685V
The road map data is based on data stored on the HDD.
• In map-matching, alternative routes to reach the destination will be G
shown and prioritized, after the road on which the vehicle is cur-
rently driven has been judged and the current-location mark has
been repositioned.
If there is an error in distance and/or direction, the alternative H
routes will be shown in different order of priority, and the wrong
road can be avoided.
If two roads are running in parallel, they are of the same priority. I
Therefore, the current-location mark may appear on either of them
alternately, depending on maneuvering of the steering wheel and
configuration of the road.
SEL686V J
• Map-matching does not function correctly when the road on which

the vehicle is driving is new and not recorded on the HDD, or when K
the road pattern stored in the map data and the actual road pattern
are different due to repair.
When driving on a road not present in the map, the map-matching
function may find another road and position the current-location L
mark on it. Then, when the correct road is detected, the current-
location mark may leap to it.
• Effective range for comparing the vehicle position and travel direc- M
tion calculated by the distance and direction with the road data
read from the HDD is limited. Therefore, when there is an exces-
sive gap between the current vehicle position and the position on
ALNIA0671GB
the map, correction by map-matching is not possible. AV
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)

GPS (Global Positioning System) has been developed and con- O
trolled by the US Department of Defense. The system utilizes GPS
satellite (NAVSTAR), sending out radio waves while flying on an orbit
around the earth at the height of approx. 21,000 km (13,000 mi).
The GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in three dimen- P
sions (latitude/longitude/altitude) according to the time lag of the
radio waves received from four or more GPS satellites (three-dimen-
sional positioning). If radio waves were received only from three
GPS satellites, the GPS receiver calculates the vehicle's position in
two dimensions (latitude/longitude), utilizing the altitude data calcu-
lated previously by using radio waves from four or more GPS satel-
SEL526V
lites (two-dimensional positioning).

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Accuracy of the GPS will deteriorate under the following conditions.
• In two-dimensional positioning, the GPS accuracy will deteriorate when the altitude of the vehicle position
changes.
• There may be an error of approximately 10 m (30 ft.) in position detected by three-dimensional positioning,
which is more accurate than two-dimensional positioning. The accuracy can be even lower depending on the
arrangement of the GPS satellites utilized for the positioning.
• Position detection is not possible when the vehicle is in an area where radio waves from the GPS satellite do
not reach, such as in a tunnel, parking lot in a building, and under an elevated highway. Radio waves from
the GPS satellites may not be received when some object is located over the GPS antenna.
• Position correction by GPS is not available while the vehicle is stopped.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV
P
AWNIA3228ZZ

M163, M164, M165, M166, M167,
switch assembly)

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
13. Front door speaker 14. Rear door speaker 15. Rear subwoofers (view under rear
RH D103 RH D302 LH B106
RH B107
16. BOSE speaker amp B109, B110

• Controls each operation of the navigation system
AV control unit • HDD is built in
• Voice guidance signal is output to BOSE speaker amp.
BOSE speaker amp. Voice guidance signal is input from AV control unit, and it is output to speakers.
Tweeter Voice guidance signal from BOSE speaker amp. is output.
• Each operation of navigation system can be performed
• Switch operating signal is output to AV control unit
Microphone Sends voice signals to AV control unit
GPS antenna GPS signal is received and is output to AV control unit.

A
D
AWNIA1921GB

E
When the shift selector is in the R position, the display unit shows a view to the rear of the vehicle. Lines which
indicate the vehicle clearance and distances are also displayed. F
AV

AWNIA3228ZZ

M163, M164, M165, M166, M167,
switch assembly)

13. Front door speaker 14. Rear door speaker 15. Rear subwoofers (view under rear B
RH D103 RH D302 LH B106
RH B107
16. BOSE speaker amp B109, B110 C

• Receives reverse signal from back-up lamp relay E
AV control unit • Receives steering angle sensor signal
• Sends camera ON signal to rear view camera
• Receives camera ON signal from the AV control unit
Rear view camera F
AV

AWNIA2705GB
NOTE:
system.
Bluetooth® telephone system allows users who have a Bluetooth® equipped cellular telephone to make a
wireless connection between their cellular telephone and the AV control unit. Hands-free cellular telephone
calls can be sent and received. Personal memos can be created using the Nissan Voice Recognition system.
Some Bluetooth® cellular telephones may not be recognized by the AV control unit. When a cellular telephone
or the AV control unit is replaced, the telephone must be paired with the AV control unit. Different cellular tele-
phones may have different pairing procedures. Refer to the cellular telephone operating manual and the vehi-
cle Owner’s Manual for more information.
AV CONTROL UNIT
When the ignition switch is turned to ACC or ON, the AV control unit will power up. During power up, the Blue-
tooth® feature is initialized and performs various self-checks. Initialization may take up to 10 seconds. If a
phone is present in the vehicle and paired with the AV control unit, Nissan Voice Recognition will then become
active. Bluetooth® telephone functions can be turned off using the Nissan Voice Recognition system.
control switch circuit changes depending on which button is pushed. The AV control unit uses this signal to
perform various functions while navigating through the voice recognition system.
• Record memos
MICROPHONE
The microphone is located in the roof console assembly. The microphone sends a signal to the AV control unit.
The microphone can be actively tested during self-diagnosis.

AV
P
AWNIA3228ZZ

M163, M164, M165, M166, M167,
switch assembly)

13. Front door speaker 14. Rear door speaker 15. Rear subwoofers (view under rear
RH D103 RH D302 LH B106
RH B107
16. BOSE speaker amp B109, B110

• Receives telephone voice signal from antenna and microphone
AV control unit
• Sends telephone voice and voice guidance signals to the speakers
• Receives audio signals from the AV control unit
BOSE speaker amp.
• Outputs amplified audio signals to the speakers.
Front door speaker
Front tweeter
through the BOSE speaker amp.
Center speaker
Microphone Sends voice signals to AV control unit
Bluetooth® antenna Sends telephone voice signal to AV control unit

A
• The AV control unit diagnosis function starts up with multifunction switch operation and the AV control unit B
• Perform a CONSULT diagnosis if the on board diagnosis does not start, e.g., the screen does not display
C
On Board Diagnosis Function INFOID:0000000009471442
MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH AND PRESET SWITCH SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION D

checked.
Self-diagnosis Mode E
• Press the “BACK” switch and the “UP” switch of the 8-direction
OFF to ACC and hold them for 3 seconds or more. Then the
F
by pressing the switch. The buzzer sounds if the switch is normal. G
NOTE:
H
JSNIA1953ZZ

Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when turning the ignition switch OFF. I
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS
Description J
• The trouble diagnosis function has a self-diagnosis mode for conducting trouble diagnosis automatically and
• The self-diagnosis mode performs diagnoses on the AV control unit, connections between system compo-
K
nents as well as connections between AV control unit and GPS antenna. Then it displays the diagnosis
results on the display.
set values, as well as to monitor the system error records and system communication status. The checking, L
modifying or adjusting generally require human intervention and judgment (the system cannot make judg-
ment automatically).
On Board Diagnosis Item M
Mode Description
• AV control unit diagnosis. AV
Self Diagnosis • Diagnoses the connections across system components, between AV
control unit and GPS antenna.
O

Mode Description
The following check functions are available: color tone check by color
Display Diagnosis bar display, light and shade check by gray scale display, touch panel cal-
ibration and response check, and color tone check by white display.
Vehicle Signals
lights, ignition, reverse, side view switch and room lamp.
Steering Angle Ad- When there is a difference between the actual turning angle and the ve-
justment hicle mark turning angle, it can be adjusted.
When there is a difference between the current location mark and the ac-
Navigation Speed Calibration
tual location, it can be adjusted.
XM Subscription
The XM NavTraffic subscription status can be checked.
Status
The system malfunction and the frequency when occurring in the past
Error History are displayed. When the malfunctioning item is selected, the time and
place that the selected malfunction last occurred are displayed.
Synchronize FES Clock –
Confirmation/
Adjustment
The communication condition of each unit of Multi AV system can be
AV COMM Diagnosis
monitored.
The received volume adjustment of hands-free phone, microphone
Hands-free Phone
speaker check, and erase memory can be performed.
The four functions of “Correct Draw Line”“Alter/Confirm Configuration”,
Camera
“Reset Configuration” and “Camera Syst Type” are available.
XM NavTraffic Change Channel
• Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from
XM NavWeather
the satellite radio system can be set.
XM Change Application ID
XM CGS • Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the
satellite radio system can be set.
Diag Not used.
Delete Unit Connection Log Erase the connection history of unit and error history.
Initialize Settings Initializes the AV control unit memory.
Version Information Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.
STARTING PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
3. While pressing the “SETTING” button, turn the volume control
dial clockwise or counterclockwise for 40 clicks or more. (When
the self-diagnosis mode is started, a short beep will be heard.)
by pressing “BACK” button.
JSNIA1954ZZ

items of “Self Diagnosis” and “Confirmation/Adjustment” can be A
selected.
JSNIA2173ZZ
D
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE
1. Start the self-diagnosis function and select “Self Diagnosis”.
- Self-diagnosis subdivision screen is displayed, and the self-diagnosis mode starts.
- The bar graph visible on the center of the self-diagnosis subdivision screen indicates progress of the trou- E
ble diagnosis.
2. Diagnosis results are displayed after the self-diagnosis is com- F

G
Connec-
Diagnosis results Unit
tion line
Normal Green Green
H
Unit malfunction Note Red Green
NOTE: I
AWNIA1940GB
Control unit (AV control unit) and amplifier (BOSE amp.) are displayed in red.
• Replace AV control unit if “Self-Diagnosis did not run because of a control unit malfunction” is indicated. The symptom is AV con-
J
• If multiple errors occur at the same time for a single unit, the screen switch colors are determined according to the following order
of priority: red > gray.
K
L
AV
JPNIA1787ZZ
Detection Range of Self-diagnosis Mode

• The self-diagnosis mode allows the technician to diagnose the connection in the communication line O
between AV control unit and each unit and the internal operation of the AV control unit.
• Because the start condition of diagnosis function is a switch operation, the on board diagnosis function can-
not be started up if any malfunction is detected in the communication circuit between AV control unit and
multifunction switch. P
Check the applicable display at the following table, and then repair the malfunctioning parts.
Only Unit Part Is Displayed In Red.

Possible malfunction location / Action to

Screen switch Description
take
Check AV control unit power supply and
Malfunction is detected in AV control unit ground circuits. When detecting no mal-
Control unit
power supply and ground circuits. function in those components, replace AV
control unit.
A Connecting Cable Between Units Is Displayed In Yellow.
Possible malfunction location / Action to

Area with yellow connection lines Description
take
Malfunction is detected in serial communi-
Serial communication circuits between AV
Control unit ⇔ Front Display cation circuits between AV control unit and
control unit and front display unit.
front display unit.
GPS antenna connection malfunctions de-
Control unit ⇔ GPS Antenna GPS antenna
tected.
screen to display the relevant trouble diagnosis screen. Press
the “Back” switch to return to the initial Confirmation/Adjustment
Mode screen.
JSNIA2483ZZ

Display Diagnosis
A
L
AWNIA1923GB
Vehicle Signals M
AV
P
JSNIA2177ZZ


ON Vehicle speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Vehicle speed
OFF Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
Parking brake
ON Light switch ON
Lights —
Ignition —
Shift the selector lever to “R” posi-
ON
tion
Shift the selector lever other than
OFF
“R” position
Side view Switch — — This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Room Lamp OFF — This item is displayed, but not used.
Speaker Test
screen. Press “Start” to generate a test tone in a speaker. Press
“Start” to generate a test tone in the next speaker. Press “Stop” to
stop the test tones.
JSNIA2178ZZ
Navigation
STEERING ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
The steering angle output value detected with the gyroscope is
adjusted.
JSNIA2179ZZ
SPEED CALIBRATION
During normal driving, distance error caused by tire wear and tire
pressure change is automatically adjusted for by the automatic dis-
tance correction function. This function, on the other hand, is for
immediate adjustment, in cases such as driving with tire chain fitted
on tires.
JSNIA2180ZZ

Error History
The self-diagnosis results are judged depending on whether any error occurs from when “Self-diagnosis” is A
However, the diagnosis results are judged normal if an error has occurred before the ignition switch is turned
B
The error record displays the time and place of the most recent occurrence of that error. However, take note of
the following points.
• If there is a malfunction with the GPS antenna circuit board in the AV control unit, the correct date and time C
of occurrence may not be able to be displayed.
• Place of the error occurrence is represented by the position of the current location mark at the time an error
occurred. If current location mark has deviated from the correct position, then the place of the error occur- D
rence cannot be located correctly.
• The frequency of occurrence is displayed in a count up manner. The actual count up method differs depend-
ing on the error item.
Count up method A E
• The counter resets to 0 if an error occurs when ignition switch is turned ON. The counter increases by 1 if
the condition is normal at a next ignition ON cycle.
• The counter upper limit is 39. Any counts exceeding 39 are ignored.“ The counter can be reset (no error F
Count up method B
• The counter increases by 1 if an error occurs when ignition switch is ON. The counter will not decrease even
if the condition is normal at the next ignition ON cycle. G
• The counter upper limit is 50. Any counts exceeding 50 are ignored. “ The counter can be reset (no error
H
rence frequency
Count up method A CAN communication line, control unit (CAN), AV communication line, control unit (AV) I
AV
JPNIA1788GB
Error item
simultaneously, the detection of the cause can be performed by the combination of display items O

Perform diagnosis with CONSULT, and P
CAN communication malfunction is detect-
ed.
(MULTI AV)".

CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ed.
CONTROL UNIT (AV)
Connection Of Gyro
Replace the AV control unit if the malfunc-
Connection of G Sensor tion occurs constantly.
Bluetooth® Module Connection Error
Sub CPU Connection Error
iPod authentification chip error
Audio connection error
DSP Connection Error • If a disc can be played, then there is a
possibility of the detection of a temporary
AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
DSP Communication Error • Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
HDD Connection Error
• If the hard disk drive (HDD) is functioning
HDD Read Error
normally, there is a possibility of a tempo-
HDD Write Error AV control unit malfunction is detected. rary malfunction.
HDD Communication Error
HDD Access Error
GPS Communication Error An intermittent error caused by strong radio
interference may be detected unless any
GPS ROM Error
symptom (GPS reception error, etc.) oc-
GPS malfunction is detected.
GPS RAM Error curs.
GPS RTC Error tion occurs constantly.
Unfinished configuration Write configuration data with CONSULT.
plete.
Check that the connection to the USB con-
USB Controller Communication Error USB connection malfunction is detected.
nector is normal.
possibility of the detection of a temporary
DVD Mechanism Communication Error AV control unit malfunction is detected. malfunction.
When either one of the following items is
detected:
• Display unit power supply and ground
circuits malfunction is detected. • Display unit power supply and ground
• Malfunction is detected in communica- circuits.
tion circuits between AV control unit and • Communication circuits between AV con-
display unit. trol unit and display unit.
• Malfunction is detected in communica-
tion signal between AV control unit and
display unit.
Check USB harness between the AV con-
USB electric current Error Detection of over current in USB interface.
trol unit and USB interface.

A
GPS antenna connection malfunction is de- Check the connection of the GPS antenna
GPS Antenna Error
tected. connector.
detected: B
• AV COMM CIRCUIT ground circuits.
• Switches Connection Error • AV communication circuits between AV
control unit and multifunction switch. C
malfunctioning.
Vehicle CAN Diagnosis D

increases by 1 if the condition is normal at the next ignition switch E
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
F
Malfunction counter
(Past)
Tx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 G
JSNIA2181ZZ
Rx(ECM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(Cluster) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
H
Rx(HVAC) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(USM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39
Rx(STRG) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 I
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN
AV COMM Diagnosis J
• Displays the communication status between AV control unit (mas-
• The error counter displays “OK” if any malfunction was not K
ON cycle. The upper limit of the counter is 39. L
• The error counter is erased if “Reset” is pressed.
Status Counter
Items M
(Current) (Past)
C Tx(ITM–PrimarySW) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 NNNIA0189ZZ
C Rx(PrimarySW–ITM) OK / ??? OK / 0 – 39 AV
NOTE:
“???” indicates UNKWN
Hands-Free Phone O

The hands-free phone reception volume adjustment and microphone
and speaker test functions are also available.
JSNIA2183ZZ
Camera
The four functions of “Correct Draw Line of Rear View Camera”,
“Alter/Confirm Configuration”, “Reset Configuration” and “Camera
Syst Type” are available.
AWNIA1925GB
Correct Draw Line of Rear View Camera

• Use this mode to adjust the guide line display position of the rear-
view monitor if necessary after removing the rear view monitor
camera.
JSNIA0085GB
Alter/Confirm Configuration
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be checked and modified.
Configuration list
Setting item Setting Setting item Setting

Predi. Course Lines Without Wheelbase 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. K 0.0000000 Total Length 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. F 0.0000000 Steering Gear Ratio 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. P1 0.0000000 Side Coeff. K 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. P2 0.0000000 Side Coeff. F 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. C1 0.0000000 Side Coeff. P1 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. C2 0.0000000 Side Coeff. P2 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. D1 0.0000000 Side Coeff. C1 0.0000000
Rear Coeff. D2 0.0000000 Side Coeff. C2 0.0000000
Car Width 0.0000000 Side Coeff. D1 0.0000000
Rear Offset 0.0000000 Side Coeff. D2 0.0000000
Rear Height 0.0000000 Side Offset 0.0000000

Setting item Setting Setting item Setting
A
Rear L/R Angle 0.0000000 Overall Height 0.0000000
Rear Up/Dn Angle 0.0000000 Side L/R Angle 0.0000000
Rear Roll Angle 0.0000000 Side Up/Dn Angle 0.0000000 B
Bumper Rear Dist. 0.0000000 Side Roll Angle 0.0000000
Bumper Rear Ax Dist 0.0000000 Side Front End Dist 0.0000000
Steer. Max Angle 0.0000000 Total Width 0.0000000 C
Min. Turning Red. 0.0000000 — —
Reset Configuration D
• Configuration stored in the AV control unit can be initialized.
G
NNNIA0180ZZ
Camera Syst Type H

• Type of camera system is selectable.
K
JSNIA2188ZZ
XM
• Change Channel L
- Any necessary channels required to receive traffic information from the satellite radio system can be set.
• Change Application ID
- Any application ID'-s required to receive traffic information from the M
satellite radio system can be set.
AV
JSNIA2484ZZ
P

control unit memory. (Clear the records of the unit that has been
removed.)
JSNIA2189ZZ
Initialize Settings
possible.
CAUTION:
details, refer to AV-525, "Description".
AWNIA2039GB
Version Information
Version information of the AV control unit is displayed.
NNNIA0181ZZ
APPLICATION ITEMS

Configuration
AV Communication
AV&NAVI C/U
AUDIO Displays the AV control unit communication status and the error counter.
ECU IDENTIFICATION

A
• The timing is displayed as “0” if any of the error codes [U1000], [U1010], [U1300] and [U1310] is detected. B
C
CAN communication malfunction is detect- then repair the malfunctioning parts ac- D

CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detect- E
ed.
F
Cont Unit [U1200]
GYRO NO CONN [U1201]
G-SENSOR NO CONN [U1202] tion occurs constantly.
G
CAN CONT [U1216]
BLUETOOTH MODULE [U1217]
H
SUB CPU CONN [U1228]
Built-in AUDIO CONN [U122E] I
HDD CONN [U1218]
HDD READ [U1219]
ing normally, there is a possibility of a J
HDD WRITE [U121A] AV control unit malfunction is detected. temporary malfunction.
HDD COMM [U121B]
HDD ACCESS [U121C] K
GPS COMM [U1204] An intermittent error caused by strong ra-
dio interference may be detected unless
GPS ROM [U1205]
any symptom (GPS reception error, etc.)
GPS malfunction is detected. L
GPS RAM [U1206] occurs.
GPS RTC [U1207] tion occurs constantly.
Check that the connection to the USB con- M
nector is normal.
possibility of the detection of a tempo- AV
O
• Replace the AV control unit if the mal- P
plete.
complete.

circuits malfunction is detected. • Communication circuits between AV
GPS antenna connection malfunction is Check the connection of the GPS antenna
GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244]
detected. connector.
detected:
• AV COMM CIRCUIT [U1300] ground circuits.
malfunctioning.
DATA MONITOR
ALL SIGNALS
• Displays the status of the following vehicle signals inputted into the AV control unit.

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG
ON.
On Ignition switch ON
IGN SIG
Off normal.
than R
This item is displayed, but cannot be
SIDE VIEW SW Off —
monitored.
ROOM LAMP Off This item is displayed, but not used. —
SELECTION FROM MENU


Item to be selected Description A

VHCL SPD SIG
PKB SIG
B
ILLUM SIG
IGN SIG The same as when “ALL SIGNALS” is selected.
REV SIG C
SIDE VIEW SW
ROOM LAMP
D
WORK SUPPORT
Conditions Description E
ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT formed. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE
F
CONFIGURATION
Configuration has three functions as follows.
G
READ CONFIGURATION
• Saves the read vehicle configuration. H
I
AV

< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle and each control unit shares information and links with other
control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction location
SULT
AV control unit is not transmitting or receiving
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
U1000 CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or CAN communication system.
[U1000]
more.

YES >> Refer to LAN system. Refer to LAN-15, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

A

DTC DTC detection condition Probable malfunction factor
SULT C
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010 CAN initial diagnosis malfunction is detected. occurs constantly. Refer to AV-652, "Removal
[U1010]
and Installation".
D
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
Replace the AV control unit if the mal-
Cont Unit
U1200 AV control unit malfunction is detected. function occurs constantly. Refer to
[U1200]
AV-652, "Removal and Installation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
GYRO NO CONN C
[U1201]
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
G-SENSOR NO CONN
[U1202]

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
An intermittent error caused by strong
C
radio interference may be detected
unless any symptom (GPS reception
GPS CONN
U1204 GPS malfunction is detected. error, etc.) occurs. Replace the AV
[U1204]
control unit if the malfunction occurs D
constantly. Refer to AV-652, "Remov-

1. Delete the “self-diagnosis” results of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Perform the self-diagnosis again.
3. Check that the DTC is detected again.
Is any DTC detected? G
NO >> An intermittent error caused by strong radio interference may be detected unless any symptom
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs. H
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
GPS ROM
[U1205]
control unit if the malfunction occurs

1. Delete the “self-diagnosis” results of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Is any DTC detected?
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
GPS RAM
[U1206]
control unit if the malfunction occurs D

1. Delete the “self-diagnosis” results of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
Is any DTC detected? G
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs. H
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
GPS RTC
[U1207]
control unit if the malfunction occurs

1. Delete the “self-diagnosis” results of “MULTI AV”. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Is any DTC detected?
(GPS reception error, etc.) occurs.

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CAN CONT C
[U1216]
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
BLUETOOTH MODULE
[U1217]

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD CONN
[U1218]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD READ
[U1219]
lation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD WRITE
[U121A]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
HDD COMM
[U121B]
lation".

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
HDD ACCESS
[U121C]
lation".
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
DSP CONN
[U121D]
lation".


A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
DSP COMM
[U121E]
lation".

F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT

A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
C
lation".

F
AV

DTC DETECTION LOGIC

SULT
and Installation".

A

SULT C
iPod CERTIFICATION
[U1229]
and Installation".
D
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
U122A The writing of configuration data is incomplete.


A

SULT C
Built-in AUDIO CONN
[U122E]
and Installation".
D
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
ST ANGLE SEN CALIB Predictive course line center position adjustment of the
sor.
When U1232 is detected, adjust the predictive course line center position of the steering angle sensor.
side. Refer to BRC-6, "ADJUSTMENT OF STEERING ANGLE SENSOR NEUTRAL POSITION :

U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
• Display unit power supply and C
• display unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc-
FRONT DISP CONN ground circuit.
U1243 tion is detected.
[U1243] • Communication circuit between AV
• communication circuit between AV control unit and dis-
play unit. D
E
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-614, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE audio system With Nav-
igation System".
F

Check display unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer to AV-572, "DISPLAY UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure". G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair malfunctioning parts. H

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect display unit connector M142 and AV control unit connector M163.
(A) terminals 9, 10 and AV control unit harness connector M163
J
(B) terminals 45 and 61.
A B
Continuity K
9 61
M142 M163 Yes
10 45 L
AWNIA1935GB
M
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
AV
9
M142 Ground No
10
Are continuity results as specified? O
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMMUNICATION SIGNAL P


U1243 DISPLAY UNIT
(+)
Connector Terminal
M142 9 Ground
AWNIA1936GB
PKIB5039J

YES >> GO TO 4.
(+)
Connector Terminal
M142 10 Ground
AWNIA1937GB
PKIB5039J


U1244 GPS ANTENNA
U1244 GPS ANTENNA
A
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
GPS ANTENNA CONN Check the connection of the GPS an-
U1244 GPS antenna connection malfunction is detected. C
[U1244] tenna connector.
igation System". E
1.GPS ANTENNA CHECK F

Inspect GPS antenna and antenna feeder for damage or poor connection.
Is the GPS antenna and feeder clean and undamaged?
YES >> GO TO 2. G
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
H
2. Check voltage between AV control unit connector M165 terminal
105 and ground.
I
(+)
Connector Terminal
J
M165 105 Ground 5V
Is the voltage reading as specified?
YES >> Replace GPS antenna. Refer to AV-666, "Removal and K

L
AV

U1263 USB
U1263 USB
Display contents of
CONSULT
U1263 Detection of over current in USB interface.
1.CHECK USB HARNESS


A
U1300 is indicated when malfunction occurs in communication signal of multi AV system. Indicated simulta- B
neously, without fail, with the malfunction of control units connected to AV control unit with communication line.
Determine the possible malfunction cause from the table below.
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM C
Display contents of
CONSULT
D
When either one of the following items are detected: • Multifunction switch power supply
• AV COMM CIRCUIT
• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuits and ground circuits.
U1300 [U1300]
are malfunctioning. • AV communication circuits between
U1240 • SWITCH CONN E
• AV communication circuits between AV control unit AV control unit and multifunction
[U1240]
and multifunction switch are malfunctioning. switch.
AV

Display contents of
CONSULT
Replace AV control unit. If the mal-
CONTROL UNIT (AV) An initial diagnosis error is detected in AV communication
U1310 function occurs constantly. Refer to
[U1310] circuit.

A
AV CONTROL UNIT
B
igation System". C
1.CHECK FUSES D
Check that the following AV control unit fuses are not blown.

E
19 Battery power 24
F
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2. G
2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK H
I
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
J
Battery Battery
7 Ground 0V
voltage voltage
M160
19 Ground
K
Battery
voltage
L
YES >> GO TO 3.
M
terminals.
AV
AWNIA1929ZZ

M160 and ground.
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
M160 20 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair AV control unit ground. AWNIA1930ZZ
DISPLAY UNIT
igation System".
1.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following display unit fuses are not blown.

11 Battery power 24
Display Unit
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
and ground.
(+)
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
11
M142 Ground
Battery Battery
23 0V
voltage voltage
Does specified voltage exist? ALNIA1217GB
YES >> GO TO 3.

2. Disconnect display unit connector. A
and ground.
B
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
M142 12 Ground Yes C
YES >> Inspection End. ALNIA1218GB
NO >> Repair harness or connector. D

A/C AND AV SWITCH ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000009471490 E
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-614, "Wiring Diagram - With BOSE audio system With Nav- F
igation System".
G
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the A/C and AV switch assembly fuse is not blown.
H
A/C and AV switch assembly 3 Ignition switch ACC or ON 17
I
Is the fuse OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
1. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98.
2. Check voltage between the A/C and AV switch assembly con- K
(+) L
(-) OFF ACC ON
Connector Terminal
Battery Battery
M98 3 Ground 0V
voltage voltage M
NO >> • Check connector housings for disconnected or loose AV

terminals.

2. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly harness
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
M98 1 Ground Yes
NO >> Repair A/C and AV switch assembly ground. ALNIA0316GB
BOSE SPEAKER AMP

igation System".
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the BOSE speaker amp. fuse is not blown.

11 26
10 25
Are the fuses OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector.
B110 terminal 10, 11 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
10
11
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Check harness between BOSE speaker amp. and fuse.

2. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector. A
tor B110 terminal 7,12 and ground.
B
(+)
(-) Continuity
Connector Terminal
7 C
B110 Ground Yes
12
Does continuity exist? AWNIA1720ZZ
YES >> Inspection End. D

REAR VIEW CAMERA
E
F
igation System".
G
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (REAR VIEW CAMERA SIDE)
1. Turn ignition switch ON. H
T101 and ground.
I
(+) Transmission
(-) Value (Approx.)
J
YES >> GO TO 4. AWNIA1722ZZ K
NO >> GO TO 2.
L
T101 (A) terminal 1 and AV control unit harness connector M164 M
(B) terminal 68.
A B AV
Continuity
T101 1 M164 68 Yes
O

P
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
T101 1 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 3.


(+)
(-) Transmission position Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal

T101 2 Ground Yes
MICROPHONE
igation System".

Check voltage between microphone harness connector R7 terminal
4 and ground.
(+)
(-) Value (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground 5V
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
WKIA5796E

2. Disconnect microphone and AV control unit harness connectors. A
terminal 44.
B
A B
Continuity
R7 4 M163 44 Yes
4. Check continuity between microphone harness connector R7 ALNIA1219GB
(A) terminal 4 and ground. D
A
— Continuity E
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground No
Are the continuity test results as specified? F
YES >> Replace the AV control unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT G
2. Disconnect microphone harness connector R7 and AV control
unit harness connector M163. H
terminal 43. I
A B
Continuity
R7 2 M163 43 Yes AWNIA1933ZZ

K
L
AV

RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Transmit the image displayed with AV control unit with RGB digital image signal to the display unit.
Regarding Wiring Diagram information, refer to AV-652, "Removal and Installation".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

nector M161.
(A) terminals 27, 28 and AV control unit harness connector
M161 (B) terminals 23 and 24.
A B
Continuity
27 23
M151 M161 Yes ALNIA1222GB
28 24
4. Check continuity between display unit harness connector M151 (A) terminals 27, 28 and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
27
M151 Ground No
28
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RGB DIGITAL IMAGE SIGNAL
nector M161.
terminals 27, 28 and ground.
(+) Voltage
(-) Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)l
27 Not con-
M151 Ground nected 1.3 V
28 connector
ALNIA1223GB


COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
AV control unit transmits the playback DVD image signal and AUX image signal to the display unit. B
C
igation System".
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY COMPOSITE IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector M163 and display unit con-
nector M142.
3. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 (A) F
terminal 40 and display unit connector M142 (B) terminal 18.
A B
Continuity G
M163 40 M142 18 Yes
4. Check continuity between AV control unit connector M163 (A) ALNIA1224GB
H
terminal 40 and ground.
A I
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M163 40 Ground No
J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair harness or connector. K
2.CHECK AUX COMPOSITE SIGNAL
1. Connect AV control unit connector M163 and display unit con-
nector M142. L
3. Check signal between AV control unit harness connector M163
terminal 40 and ground. M
(+)
Connector Terminal AV
ALNIA1225GB
O
At DVD
M163 40 Ground image is
displayed
P
SKIB2251J


AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Transmits the image signal of AUX device from auxiliary input jacks to AV control unit.
• AV control unit transmits the image signal that is input to the display unit.
igation System".
1.CHECK CONTINUITY AUX IMAGE SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect auxiliary input jack connector M209 and AV control unit connector M164.
3. Check continuity between auxiliary input jack harness connector M209 (A) terminal 7 and AV control unit
harness connector M164 (B) terminal 76.
A B
Continuity
M209 7 M164 76 Yes
4. Check continuity between auxiliary input jack harness connector M209 (A) terminal 8 and ground.
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
M209 7 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK AUX IMAGE SIGNAL
1. Connect auxiliary input jack connector M209 and AV control unit connector M164.
3. Check signal between auxiliary input jack connector M209 terminal 7 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
Receive
M209 7 Ground video sig-
nal
SKIB2251J

YES >> Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and Installation" .
NO >> Check that there is no malfunction in the external device.

DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
The eject signal is output to AV control unit when the eject switch of A/C and AV switch assembly is pressed. B
C
igation System".
D
1.CHECK CONTINUITY DISK EJECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 and AV
control unit connector M164.
3. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connec- F
tor M98 (A) terminal 14 and AV control unit harness connector
M164 (B) terminal 82.
G
A B
Continuity
H
4. Check continuity between A/C and AV switch assembly connec-
tor M98 (A) terminal 14 and ground.
I
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
J
M98 14 Ground No
YES >> GO TO 2. K
1. Connect A/C and AV switch assembly connector M98 and AV L
control unit connector M164.
3. Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M164 M
terminal 82 and ground.
(+) Voltage AV
(-) Condition
Connector Terminal (Approx.)
Pressing
the eject 0V O
ALNIA1227GB
M164 82 Ground switch
Except for
5.0 V
above P
YES >> Replace A/C and AV switch assembly. Refer to AV-654, "Removal and Installation".

Voice signals are transmitted from the microphone to the AV control unit using the microphone signal circuits.
igation System".
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN AV CONTROL UNIT AND MICROPHONE

2. Disconnect AV control unit connector and microphone connec-
tor.
M163 (A) and microphone harness connector R7 (B).
A B
Continuity
59 1
M163 43 R7 2 Yes
44 4
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
44
M163 43 Ground No
59
AWLIA1762ZZ

YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Connect AV control unit connector and microphone connector.
minal 4 and ground.
(+)
(-) Voltage (approx)
Connector Terminal
R7 4 Ground 5V
Is voltage reading approx. 5 volts?
YES >> GO TO 3. WKIA5796E


Check signal between AV control unit harness connector M163 ter-
minals 43 and 59. A
(+) (-)
Connector Reference signal
Terminal Terminal B
While speaking into MIC
C
M163 59 43
ALNIA1216GB
D
PKIB5037J
Are voltage readings as specified? E

NO >> Replace microphone. Refer to AV-672, "Removal and Installation".
F
AV

When the audio system is turned on, a voltage signal is supplied from the AV control unit to the BOSE speaker
igation System".
1.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (BOSE SPEAKER AMP)

B109 terminal 20 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
NO >> GO TO 2.
AWNIA1707ZZ
2.CHECK AMP ON SIGNAL (AV CONTROL UNIT)

Check voltage between AV control unit harness connector M160 ter-
minal 1 and ground.
(+)
Connector Terminal
YES >> Repair harness or connector.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
audio signals before sending them to the front door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
igation System". D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK E
• Damage F
YES >> GO TO 2 G
2.HARNESS CHECK
speaker connector.
tor B109 (A) and suspect speaker harness connector (B). I
A B Continuity
18 1
D3
19 2
B109 Yes K
31 1
D103
32 2
A M
- Continuity
Connector Terminal
18
AV
19
B109 Ground No
31 AWNIA1694ZZ
32 O
YES >> GO TO 3.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
speaker connector.

Condition
tor (+) (-) signal
18 19
Receive
B109 audio sig-
31 32 nal
SKIA0177E

and Installation".
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M160 B109 Yes
11 33
12 34
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M160 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12
YES >> GO TO 5.

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
2 3
D
Receive
M160 audio sig-
11 12 nal E
SKIA0177E

AV

TWEETER
TWEETER
audio signals before sending them to the tweeters using the audio signal circuits.
igation System".
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
tweeter connector.
tor B110 (A) and suspect tweeter harness connector (B).
A B
Continuity
1 1
M51
2 2
B110 Yes
4 1
M52
3 2
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
1
2
B110 Ground No
4 AWNIA1697ZZ
3
YES >> GO TO 3.

TWEETER
tweeter connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
1 2
D
Receive
B110 audio sig-
4 3 nal E
SKIA0177E

and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 4. G
AWNIA1698ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M160 B109 Yes K
11 33
12 34
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
AV
3
M160 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

TWEETER
connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
2 3
Receive
M160 audio sig-
11 12 nal
SKIA0177E


CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
A
audio signals before sending them to the center speaker using the audio signal circuits.
igation System". D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK E
• Damage F
YES >> GO TO 2 G
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connector B109 and center H
speaker connector M130.
tor B109 (A) and center speaker harness connector M130 (B). I
A B
Continuity
29 1
B109 M130 Yes
30 2
K
AWNIA1699ZZ

L
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
29 M
B109 Ground No
30
AV
YES >> GO TO 3.
O
P

CENTER SPEAKER
speaker connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
AWNIA1700ZZ
Receive
nal
SKIA0177E

NO >> GO TO 4.
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
2 35
3 36
M160 B109 Yes
11 33
12 34
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
2
3
M160 Ground No
11 AWNIA1696ZZ
12
YES >> GO TO 5.

CENTER SPEAKER
connector. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
2 3
D
Receive
M160 audio sig-
11 12 nal E
SKIA0177E

AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
audio signals before sending them to the rear door speakers using the audio signal circuits.
igation System".
1.CONNECTOR CHECK
• Damage
YES >> GO TO 2
2.HARNESS CHECK
1. Disconnect BOSE speaker amp. connectors B109, B110 and
tors B109 (A) and B110 (B) and suspect speaker harness con-
nector (C).

15 2
A: B109 C: D202
28 1
Yes
9 2
B: B110 C: D302
14 1
Connector Terminal - Continuity

15
A: B109
28
Ground No
9
B: B110
14
AWNIA1702ZZ

YES >> GO TO 3.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
connector. A
B
scope.
C
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
A: B109 28 15 D
Receive
audio sig- E
B: B110 14 9 nal
SKIA0177E
F
4.HARNESS CHECK
H
A B
Continuity J
4 24
5 23
M160 B109 Yes K
13 26
14 25
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
AV
5
M160 Ground No
13 AWNIA1704ZZ
14 O
YES >> GO TO 5.

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
4 5
Receive
M160 audio sig-
13 14 nal
SKIA0177E


SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
audio signals before sending them to the subwoofers using the audio signal circuits.
igation System". D
1.CONNECTOR CHECK E
Check the AV control unit, BOSE speaker amp. and subwoofer connectors for the following:
• Damage F
YES >> GO TO 2 G
2.HARNESS CHECK
rear subwoofer connector.
tor B110 (A) and suspect rear subwoofer harness connector (B). I
A B
Continuity
13 1
B106
8 2
B110 Yes K
5 1
B107
6 2
A M
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
13
AV
8
B110 Ground No
5 AWNIA1705ZZ
6 O
YES >> GO TO 3.

SUBWOOFER
subwoofer connector.
Terminals Reference
Connector Condition
(+) (-) signal
13 8
Receive au-
B110
5 6 dio signal
SKIA0177E

NO >> GO TO 4.
AWNIA1706ZZ
4.HARNESS CHECK
A B
Continuity
4 24
5 23
M160 B109 Yes
13 26
14 25
A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
4
5
M160 Ground No
13 AWNIA1704ZZ
14
YES >> GO TO 5.

SUBWOOFER
amp. connector B109. A
B
Terminals Reference
(+) (-) signal
4 5
D
Receive
M160 audio sig-
13 14 nal E
SKIA0177E

AV

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
When one of the steering wheel audio control switches is pushed, the resistance in the steering wheel audio
igation System".
1.CHECK STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH RESISTANCE

2. Disconnect steering wheel audio control switch connector M88.
Resistance
(Approx.)
Enter Depress ENTER switch. 2023
Voice recognition Depress switch. 723
14 Menu (down) Depress switch. 321

AWNIA1708ZZ
Menu (up) Depress switch. 121
17
Menu back Depress the back switch. 723
Phone Depress switch. 321

15
Volume (up) Depress VOL up switch. 121
Volume (down) Depress VOL down switch. 0
Do the steering wheel audio control switches check OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace steering wheel audio control switch. Refer to AV-667, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) AND AV CONTROL UNIT
1. Disconnect AV control unit connector M160 and combination
switch (spiral cable) connector M30.
M160 (A) and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connec-
tor M30 (B).
A B
Continuity
6 24
M160 15 M30 33 Yes AWNIA1709ZZ
16 31
3. Check continuity between AV switch connector M160 (A) and ground.

STEERING SWITCH
A A
— Continuity
Connector Terminal
6
B
M160 15 Ground No
16
Are the continuity results as specified? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.COMBINATION SWITCH (SPIRAL CABLE) CHECK D
1. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) connector M88.

E
A B
Continuity F
24 14
M30 31 M88 15 Yes G
33 17
AWNIA1710ZZ
Does the combination switch (spiral cable) check OK?
H
I
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]

AV CONTROL UNIT

CONSULT data monitor item
Dis-
play
ON Vehicle speed >0 km/h (0 MPH) Changes in indication may be delayed. This is
VHCL SPD SIG
OFF Vehicle speed =0 km/h (0 MPH) normal.
ON Parking brake is applied. Changes in indication may be delayed. This is

PKB SIG
OFF Parking brake is released. normal.

ON light optical sensor when the light
SW is ON.
ILLUM SIG —
ON.
IGN SIG —
OFF normal.
than R
TERMINAL LAYOUT
AWNIA1934ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal A
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
1
Ground Amp. ON signal Output switch — Battery voltage
(B/P)
ON
C
Ignition D
2 3 Pre-amp. audio signal front
(G) (R) LH
ON
E
SKIB3609E
F
Ignition
4 5 Pre-amp. audio signal rear
(W/R) (W/L) LH
ON
G
SKIB3609E
Depress SOURCE switch. 0V H

Ignition Depress switch. 2.0V
6 15 I
Steering switch signal A Input switch
(W/G) (L/B)
OFF Depress switch. 3.0V
Depress ENTER switch. 4.0V

J
Ignition
7
Ground ACC power supply Input switch − Battery voltage
(V/Y) K
ACC
9 Lighting switch is OFF 0V

Ground Illumination signal Input OFF
(R/L) Lighting switch is ON Battery voltage
L
Ignition M
11 12 Pre-amp. audio signal front
(B) (W) RH
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
O
Ignition
13 14
Audio signal rear RH Output switch Audio output
(V) (LG)
ON
P
SKIB3609E
Ignition
15 Steering switch signal
Ground — switch — 0V
(L/B) ground
ON

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Depress VOL down switch. 0V
Depress VOL up switch. 1.0V
Ignition
16 15
Steering switch signal B Input switch Depress switch. 2.0V
(GR/L) (L/B)
ON
Depress the back switch. 3.0V
Except for the above. 5.0V
Ignition
19
(Y/R)
OFF
Ignition
20
(B)
ON
Ignition
23 RGB digital image signal
Ground Output switch Not connected connector. 1.3 V
(R) (+)
ON
Ignition
Ground Output switch Not connected connector. 1.3 V
(W) (−)
ON
25
— USB ground — — — —
(B)
26
— USB D− — — — —
(W)
27
(R)
28
— USB D+ — — — —
(G)
Ignition Parking brake is ON. 5.0 V
37
(G/R) Parking brake is OFF. 0V
ON
Ignition
39
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition
40
Ground Composite image signal Output switch At DVD image is displayed.
(R)
ON
SKIB2251J
43 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
44
Ground Microphone VCC Output switch — 5.0 V
(R)
ON
Ignition
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
46 Input/ B
— CAN–L — — —
(P) Output
47 AV communication signal Input/
— — — —
(P) (L) Output C
— — — —
(P) (L) Output
Ignition Lighting switch is OFF. 0V D
51
Ground Illumination signal Input switch
(R/L) Lighting switch is ON. 12.0 V
OFF
Ignition E
52
(G)
ON
Ignition R position 12.0 V
53
F
ON
NOTE:
Maximum voltage may be 12.0 V G
due to specifications (connected
units).
Ignition H
54 Vehicle speed signal (8- When vehicle speed is ap-
Ground Input switch
(V/W) pulse) prox. 40 km/h (25 MPH)
ON
SKIA6649J
55 — Shield — — — — J
Ignition K
56 Composite synchronizing
(B) signal
ON
L
SKIA0187E
M
Ignition
59
Ground Microphone signal Input switch Give a voice
(L)
ON AV
PKIB5037J
60 — Shield — — — —
O
P
Ignition
Ground Input switch
(BR) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
62 Input/
— CAN–H — — —
(L) Output

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
— — — —
(L) (H) Output
Ignition
67
Ground Rear view camera ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition R position. 6.0 V
68
Ground Camera ON signal Output switch
(R) Other than R position. 0V
ON
Ignition
75
Ground AUX image signal ground — switch — 0V
(V)
ON
Ignition
76 75
AUX image signal Input switch At AUX image is displayed.
(LG) (V)
ON
SKIB2251J
77 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
81
Ground Switch ground — switch — 0V
(BR)
ON
Ignition Pressing the eject switch. 0V
82 81
Disk eject signal Input switch
(SB) (BR) Except for above. 5.0 V
ON
105
— GPS antenna signal — — — —
(B)
106 — Shield — — — —
108 Amplified window antenna
— Input — — —
(B) signal
Ignition
109
Ground Antenna amp. ON signal Output switch — Battery voltage
(B)
ACC
110
— Satellite antenna signal — — — —
(B)
111
— Shield — — — —
(B)
Ignition
AUX sound signal LH Input switch
(W) (R) ed.
ON
SKIB3609E

AV CONTROL UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
128 — Shield — — — — B
C
Ignition
AUX sound signal RH Input switch
(B) (R) ed.
ON
D
SKIB3609E
DTC Index INFOID:0000000009471519 E
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS DISPLAY ITEM

F
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) [1010] AV-541, "DTC Logic"
G
U1201 GYRO NO CONN [U1201] AV-543, "DTC Logic" H
U1202 G-SENSOR NO CONN [U1202] AV-544, "DTC Logic"
U1204 GPS COMM [U1204] AV-545, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1205 GPS ROM [U1205] AV-546, "Diagnosis Procedure" I
U1206 GPS RAM [U1206] AV-547, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1207 GPS RTC [U1207] AV-548, "Diagnosis Procedure"
J
U1217 BLUETOOTH MODULE [U1217] AV-550, "DTC Logic"
U1218 HDD CONN [U1218] AV-551, "DTC Logic" K
U1219 HDD READ [U1219] AV-552, "DTC Logic"
U121A HDD WRITE [U121A] AV-553, "DTC Logic"
L
U121C HDD ACCESS [U121C] AV-555, "DTC Logic"
U121D DSP CONN [U121D] AV-556, "Diagnosis Procedure" M
U1225 USB CONTROLLER [U1225] AV-558, "DTC Logic"
AV
U1228 SUB CPU CONN [U1228] AV-560, "DTC Logic"
U1229 iPod CERTIFICATION [U1229] AV-561, "DTC Logic" O
U1232 ST ANGLE SEN CALIB [1232] AV-564, "Diagnosis Procedure" P
U1243 FRONT DISP CONN [U1243] AV-565, "Diagnosis Procedure"
U1244 GPS ANTENNA CONN [U1244] AV-567, "Diagnosis Procedure"

AV CONTROL UNIT

DISPLAY UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
AWNIA1927ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
6 — Shield — — — —
7 — Shield — — — — H
Ignition I
8 Rear view camera image At rear view camera image
Ground Input switch
(B) signal is displayed.
ON
J
SKIB2251J
K
Ignition
9 Communication signal When adjusting display-
(BR) (DISP→CONT) brightness.
ON L
PKIB5039J
Ignition
10
Ground
Communication signal
Input switch
When adjusting display- AV
(Y) (CONT→DISP) brightness.
ON
PKIB5039J
O
Ignition
11
Ground Battery power supply Input switch — Battery Voltage
(Y/R)
OFF P
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

DISPLAY UNIT
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
18
Ground Composite image signal Input switch At DVD image is displayed.
(R)
ON
SKIB2251J
Ignition
19
Ground Composite image ground — switch — 0V
(W)
ON
Ignition
20 Composite synchronizing
(B) signal
ON
SKIB3603E
22 — Shield — — — —
Ignition
23
Ground ACC power supply Input switch — —
(V/Y)
ACC
— Input — — —
(R) (+)
— Input — — —
(W) (-)

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
A
TERMINAL LAYOUT B
ALNIA1165ZZ E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name G
Output
H
Ignition
1 2
Audio signal tweeter LH Output switch Audio output
(LG) (V)
ON
I
SKIB3609E
Ignition
4 3
Audio signal tweeter RH Output switch Audio output K
(G) (W)
ON
SKIB3609E L
Ignition M
5 6
(R) (BR)
ON
AV
SKIB3609E
Ignition
7
(B)
Ground Ground — switch — 0V O
ON
Ignition
10
(SB) P
OFF
Ignition
11
(GR)
OFF
Ignition
12
(B)
ON

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
Ignition
13 8
(L) (P)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
14 9 Audio signal rear door
(LG) (O) speaker RH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
18 19 Audio signal front door
(W) (B) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
20
(SB)
ACC
Ignition
24 23
(GR) (L)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
26 25
Audio signal rear RH Input switch Audio input
(BR) (Y)
ON
SKIB3609E
Ignition
28 15 Audio signal rear door
(G) (L) speaker LH
ON
SKIB3609E

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
Terminal
Description
Condition
Input/ (Approx.)
+ – Signal name
Output
B
Ignition
29 30 Audio signal center speak- C
(V) (P) er
ON
SKIB3609E D
E
Ignition
31 32 Audio signal front door
(R) (BR) speaker RH
ON
F
SKIB3609E
Ignition
33 34
Audio signal front RH Input switch Audio input
(LG) (V)
ON
H
SKIB3609E
I
35 36
Ignition J
(W) (B)
ON
K
SKIB3609E
AV

COLOR DISPLAY
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
WIRING DIAGRAM
COLOR DISPLAY
Wiring Diagram - With BOSE audio system With Navigation System INFOID:0000000009471522
ABNWA1938GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA1516GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNWA1983GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNWA0539GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5118GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
AANIA0700GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA2388GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5119GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5167GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5168GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5120GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5169GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5121GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA1656GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA1657GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA1658GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5122GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5123GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA5124GB

COLOR DISPLAY
AV
ABNIA5125GB

COLOR DISPLAY
ABNIA1663GB

MULTI AV SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
B
RELATED TO NAVIGATION
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom C

• Multifunction switch power supply and ground circuit. D
• All switches cannot be operated. Refer to AV-600, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• “MULTI AV” is displayed on system • AV communication circuit between AV control unit and
selection screen when the CONSULT multifunction switch.
E
is started. Perform CONSULT self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-536,
"CONSULT Function (MULTI AV)".
Multifunction switch and preset • All switches cannot be operated.
AV control unit power supply and ground circuit malfunc- F
switch operation does not work. • “MULTI AV” is not displayed on sys-
tion. Refer to AV-571, "AV CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis
tem selection screen when the CON-
Procedure".
SULT is initialized.
Multifunction switch or preset switch malfunction. G
Only specified switch cannot be operat- Perform multifunction switch and preset switch self-di-
ed. agnosis function.
H
There is malfunction in the CONSULT Perform detected DTC self-diagnosis.
Fuel economy display is abnor- self-diagnosis result. Refer to AV-536, "CONSULT Function (MULTI AV)".
mal. There is no malfunction in the self-diag- Ignition signal circuit malfunction.
nosis results. Refer to PCS-56, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
Start of the AV control unit takes
— Room lamp timer control circuit malfunction.
time.
On the setting display select “system
J
Guide sound is not heard or too
sound (guide sound volume, etc.),” and Voice guidance signal circuit malfunction.
low.
confirm that guide sound is ON.
K
the vehicle.
• It is possible that a malfunction is occurring due to a version change of the phone even though the phone is L
checking that it operates normally. It is important to determine whether the cause of the malfunction is the
vehicle or the cellular phone. M
Check Compatibility
AV
NOTE:
O
3. Write down the customer’s phone brand, model, and service provider.
NOTE:
It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved list with one
P
provider, but may not be on the approved list with other providers.
4. Go to "www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/".
Stop diagnosis here. the customer need to obtain a Bluetooth phone that is on the approved list before
any further action.
c. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as "N" (not compatible):
Stop diagnosis here. If the customer still wants the feature to function. they will need to get an approved
phone showing the feature as "Y"(compatible) in the "Basic features" list.
d. If the feature related to the customer’s concern shows as "Y" (compatible):
Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom

Does not recognize cellular
phone connection. (no connec-
Repeat the registration of cellular phone.
tion is displayed on the display
at the guide.)
made, but the communication cannot
be established. AV control unit malfunction.
Hands-free phone cannot be
• Hands-free phone operation can be Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and
established.
performed, however, voice between Installation".
each other cannot be heard during the
conversation.
Check the “microphone speaker” in In-
The other party's voice cannot
spection & Adjustment Mode if sound is
be heard by hands-free phone.
heard.
Originating sound is not heard Sound operation function is normal.

by the other party with hands- Microphone signal circuit malfunction.
free phone communication. Sound operation function does not work.
• Steering switch's ”VOL UP”, “VOL Steering switch malfunction. Replace steering wheel.
DOWN”, “ ” switch works, but “ ” it Refer to AV-667, "Removal and Installation"
does not work.
The system cannot be operat- • The voice recognition can be controlled.
ed. Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
• Steering switch's “ ”, ”VOL UP”, “VOL
DOWN”, “ ” switches do not work.
RELATED TO RGB IMAGE


RGB image is not shown. — RGB digital image signal circuit malfunction.
RELATED TO VOICE CONTROL


AV control unit malfunction.
Voice sounds at “Voice Microphone Test”
Replace AV control unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and
The voice cannot be controlled of Confirmation/Adjustment mode.
Installation".
even if the voice control screen
is displayed. Voice does not sound at “Voice Micro-
Microphone circuit malfunction.
phone Test” of Confirmation/Adjustment
mode.

A
• Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ENTER” switch
works, but “ ” does not work. Steering switch malfunction.
• Hands-free phone system can be oper- B
The voice cannot be controlled ated.
(Voice control screen is not dis-
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU
played). Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
UP”, “MENU DOWN”, “ ”, “ENTER” Refer to AV-600, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
switches do not work.
Refer to AV-600, "Diagnosis Procedure". D
RELATED TO AUDIO

E

The disk cannot be removed. AV control unit Refer to AV-525, "On Board Diagnosis
Function". F
AV

BOSE audio system With Navigation
System".
• Bose amp. ON signal circuit malfunction.
• Bose speaker amp. power supply and
: Diagnosis Procedure".
AV control unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
- AV-585, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door speaker).
- AV-588, "Diagnosis Procedure" (tweet-
er).
- AV-591, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center
speaker).
- AV-594, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear
door speaker).
- AV-597, "Diagnosis Procedure" (sub-
woofer).
Bose speaker amp. and speaker.
No sound comes out or the level of the Refer to:
sound is low. - AV-585, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door speaker).
Only a certain speaker (front door speaker
er).
LH, front door speaker RH,tweeter LH,
tweeter RH, center speaker, rear door
speaker).
speaker LH, rear door speaker RH, rear
subwoofer LH, rear subwoofer RH) does
door speaker).
not output sound.
woofer).
Refer to:
- AV-661, "Removal and Installation" (front
door speaker).
- AV-659, "Removal and Installation"
(tweeter).
- AV-660, "Removal and Installation" (cen-
ter speaker).
- AV-662, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
- AV-663, "Removal and Installation" (sub-
woofer).
Refer to AV-525, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
Replace Bose speaker amp. Refer to AV-
664, "Removal and Installation".

A
Refer to AV-525, "On Board Diagnosis
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp. B
664, "Removal and Installation".
C
AV control unit and Bose speaker amp.
Refer to:
- AV-585, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front D
door speaker).
er).
- AV-591, "Diagnosis Procedure" (center E
speaker).
door speaker).
- AV-597, "Diagnosis Procedure" (sub- F
woofer).
Bose speaker amp. and speaker.
Refer to: G
- AV-585, "Diagnosis Procedure" (front
door speaker).
H
er).
Noise comes out only from a certain speak-
Noise is mixed with audio. er (front door speaker LH, front door speak-
speaker).
er RH,tweeter LH, tweeter RH, center
- AV-594, "Diagnosis Procedure" (rear I
speaker, rear door speaker LH, rear door
door speaker).
speaker RH, rear subwoofer LH, rearsub-
woofer RH).
woofer).
• Malfunction in speaker. J
• Poor Installation of speaker (e.g. back-
lash and looseness).
Refer to:
- AV-661, "Removal and Installation" (front K
door speaker).
- AV-659, "Removal and Installation"
(tweeter).
- AV-660, "Removal and Installation" (cen- L
ter speaker).
- AV-662, "Removal and Installation" (rear
door speaker).
M
- AV-663, "Removal and Installation" (sub-
woofer).
Refer to AV-525, "On Board Diagnosis AV
Function".
• Malfunction in Bose speaker amp.
664, "Removal and Installation". O
roads) Refer to AV-668, "Location of Antenna". P

or trim section.
RELATED TO USB
NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of USB equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.
Symptoms Check items Possible malfunction location / Action to take
iPod® or USB memory can not —

• USB harness malfunction.
be recognized. • USB connector malfunction.
iPod® is a trademark of Apple inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
RELATED TO DVD MODE

Disk eject signal circuit malfunction between AV control
The DVD cannot be removed. — unit and preset switch.
Perform CONSULT self-diagnosis. Refer to AV-536,
"CONSULT Function (MULTI AV)". When detecting no
malfunction in those components, the following items are
DVD image is not displayed. —
a possible cause.
• Composite image signal circuits malfunction.
Perform CONSULT self-diagnosis.
Audio sound is not heard.
Perform CONSULT self-diagnosis.
Sound is heard only from specific places.
RELATED TO STEERING SWITCH

Symptoms Probable malfunction location

None of the steering switch operations work.
Only specified switch cannot be operated. Steering switch malfunction.
Steering switch's “SOURCE”, “MENU UP”, “MENU Steering switch signal A circuit malfunction.
DOWN”,“ ”, “ENTER”switches do not work. Refer to AV-600, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Steering switch's “ ”, “VOL UP”, “VOL DOWN”, “ ” Steering switch signal B circuit malfunction.
switches do not work. Refer to AV-600, "Diagnosis Procedure".
RELATED TO AUXILIARY INPUT

NOTE:
Check that there is no malfunction of AUX equipment main body before performing a diagnosis.

Trouble diagnosis chart by symptom
Symptoms Check items Probable malfunction location A
No voice sound is heard when Voice sound is heard when other modes
AUX sound signal circuit.
AUX mode is selected. are selected.
AUX image signal circuit malfunction. B
DVD image is displayed.
Image is not displayed when Refer to AV-580, "Diagnosis Procedure".
AUX mode is selected. Composite image signal circuit malfunction.
DVD image is not displayed.
Refer to AV-579, "Diagnosis Procedure". C
AV

NOTE:
For Navigation system operation information, refer to Navigation system Owner's Manual.
BASIC OPERATIONS
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The brightness is at the lowest setting. Adjust the brightness of the display.
The systems in the video mode. Press “DISC-AUX” to change the mode.
No image is displayed. The display is turned off. Press “ -” to turn on the display.
The interior of the vehicle becomes the a little less
Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
than 80°C (176°F) or high temperature, and the pro-
cooled down.
tection of the display acts, and a display is turned off.
Screen not clear. Contrast setting is not appropriate. Adjust the contrast of the display.
The volume is not set correctly, or it is turned off. Adjust the volume of voice guidance.
No voice guidance is available. Or
The volume is too high or too low. Voice guidance is not provided for certain streets
This is not a malfunction.
(roads displayed in gray).
No map is displayed on the screen. A screen other than map screen is displayed. Press “MAP”.
The screen is too dim. The move- Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
The temperature in the interior of the vehicle is high.
ment is slow. cooled down.
Some pixels in the display are dark- This condition is an inherent characteristic of liquid
er or brighter than others. crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be se- Some menu items become unavailable while the ve- Park the vehicle in a safe location, and
lected. hicle is driven. then operate the navigation system.
NOTE:
Locations stored in the Address Book and other memory functions may be lost if the vehicle's battery is dis-
connected or becomes discharged. If this occurs, service the vehicle's battery as necessary and re-enter the
information in the Address Book.

®
Some Bluetooth enabled cellular phones may not be recognized
lowing conditions:
• The vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive radio
NOTE:
call.

RELATED TO VOICE RECOGNITION
A
Related to Basic Operation

B
The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or have other occupants quiet.
The volume of your voice is too low. Speak louder.
The volume if your voice is too loud. Speak softer. C
Your pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.
The system does not
recognize your com- Press and release “ ” switch on the steering
You are speaking before the voice recognition is ready switch, and speak a command after the tone D
mand.
or sounds.
The system recognizes Make sure to speak a command within 8 seconds
your command incor- 8 seconds or more have passed after you pressed and
after you press and release “ ” switch on the E
rectly released “ ” switch on the steering switch.
steering switch.
Only a limited range of voice commands is usable for Use a correct voice command appropriate for the
each screen. current screen. F
Lower the fan speed as necessary as voice com-
The fan of the air conditioner is too loud.
mands can be recognized more easily.
G
Related to Item Choice
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, fol-
low the solutions given in this guide for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem H
is resolved.
Symptom/ error message Solution I

1. Ensure that the command format is valid.
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise
level. J
Displays “COMMAND NOT REC-
OGNIZED” or the system fails to in- 3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
terpret the command correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized. K
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then command should be tried with these
in place.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed L
The system consistently selects by giving the “Addressbook” Directory or Phone Directory command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
M
Related to Telephone
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try
the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is AV
resolved.

Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at level appropriate to the ambient noise lev-
el in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster
System fails to interpret the com- on).
mand correctly. NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be
carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA)
mode” earlier in this section. Refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This
The system consistently selects can be confirmed by using the “List Names” command.
the wrong voicetag
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
RELATED TO AUDIO
• The majority of the audio malfunctions are the result of outside causes (bad CD/cassette, electromagnetic
interference, etc.). Check the symptoms below to diagnose the malfunction.
• The vehicle itself can be a source of noise if noise prevention parts or electrical equipment is malfunctioning.
Check if noise is caused and/or changed by engine speed, ignition switch turned to each position, and oper-
ation of each piece of electrical equipment, and then determine the cause.
NOTE:
• CD-R is not guaranteed to play because they can contain compressed audio (MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A) or
could be incorrectly mastered by the customer on a computer.
• Check if the CDs carry the Compact Disc Logo. If not, the disc is not mastered to the “red book” Compact
Disc Standard and may not play.

Check if the CD was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone
(about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal
temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A files on a CD, only
Cannot play
the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “M4A” “.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac” or “.m4a”
cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format, This may occur depending on the
variation or the setting of MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A writing applications or other text editing applica-
tions.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA/AAC/M4A CD, or if it is a multisession disc,
the music starts playing. some time may be required before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing
Music cuts off or skips
depth, writing width might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities if data such as for high bit rate data.

A
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”,“M4A”
Move immediately to the next song
“.mp3”, “.wma”, “.aac”or “.m4a” or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will
when playing
skip to the next song.
The songs do not play back in the The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the software, so the files might B
desired order. not play in the desired order.
Noise resulting from variations in field strength, such as fading noise and multi-path noise, or external noise from trains and other
sources, is not a malfunction. C
NOTE:
• Fading noise: This noise occurs because of variations in the field strength in a narrow range due to mountains or buildings blocking
the signal. D
• Multi-path noise: This noise results from a time difference between the broadcast waves directly from the station arriving at the
antenna and the waves reflected by mountains or buildings.
RELATED TO DVD E

Some operations may be rejected or may not function F
Not working as operated as intended because of the manufacturer's intent, de- This is not a malfunction.
pending on DVD.
If a requested operation is prohibited, then a message G
Operation not accepted is displayed on the screen. (Message display depends This is not a malfunction.
on DVD.)
Check that the DVD is inserted in the right place. Upturn the DVD (facing the title upward).
H
wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour)
Check if there is condensation inside the player.
before using the player.
DVD menu is displayed. Select item to touch “ENTER” I
DVD can not be played
DVDs with a different region code can not be
Insertion of a DVD with a different region code.
played. Check DVD.
Some DVD softwares may not be played because not
This is not a malfunction. J
all DVD softwares fully comply in the standard.
Interruption during play-
Errors may not be corrected depending on the
back or flicker in the dis-
Check that the DVD has no scratches and dirt. size of scratches. K
play
Low sound quality Wipe and clean the dirt on the disc.
Distortion in picture In the process of fast-forward or fast-reverse. This is not a malfunction. L
Subtitle setting is OFF. Set subtitle.
Subtitles not shown
Subtitle is not included in the software. Check DVD.
If a language is not included in the DVD, then the DVD M
Not played in set language Check DVD.
is played in a recommended language.
If a set subtitle is not included in the DVD, then the
Not played with set subtitle Check DVD.
DVD is played with a recommended subtitle. AV
The inclusion of the number of languages de-
Subtitle and language not The DVD is not multilanguage-capable. pends on DVD. Languages may be selectable on
selectable (not played with the Menu screen. Check DVD. O
set subtitle or in set lan- If the DVD has a priority language or settings,
guage) The DVD has a priority language or setting. then settings changed with this device are not re-
flected.
P
Angle unchangeable Plural angles are not recorded in the software. Check if the DVD is multi-angle-capable.
Display mode to the output aspect ratio for the DVD
Unusual screen display Switch to the appropriate display mode.
software is inappropriate.
Playback of Mix mode Truck 1. (Mix mode: Format in-
Playback time is indicated,
cluding Truck 1 with data other than music and Trucks Play music data included in trucks from Truck 2.
but no sound comes out.
from Truck 2 with music data.)

RELATED TO VEHICLE ICON

This is because the quantity of the displayed in-
formation is reduced so that the screen does
Names of roads differ between Plan not become too crowded. There is also a
chance that names of the roads may be dis- This is not a malfunction.
View and Birdview™. played multiple times, and the names appear-
ing on the screen may be different because of
a processing procedure.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition
Drive the vehicle for a while on a road where
switch was pressed off, for example, by a ferry
GPS signals can be received.
or car transporter.
The vehicle icon is not displayed in
the correct position. The position and direction of the vehicle icon
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle for
may be incorrect depending on the driving en-
a while to automatically correct the position
vironments and the levels of positioning accu-
and direction of the vehicle icon.
racy of the navigation system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a Because the new road is not stored in the map
Updated road information will be included in
new road, the vehicle icon is located data, the system automatically places the vehi-
the next version of the map data.
on another road nearby. cle icon on the nearest road available.
The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the Set the screen to the night screen mode using
night screen even after turning on
headlights were turned on. <Day/Night> when you turn on the headlights.
the headlights.
The map does not scroll even when The current location map screen is not dis-
Press “MAP”.
the vehicle is moving. played.
The current location map screen is not dis-
The vehicle icon is not displayed. Press “MAP”.
played.
Drive the vehicle for a while [at approximately
30 km/h (19 MPH) for about 30 minutes] to
When using tire chains or replacing the tires,
automatically correct the vehicle icon posi-
speed calculations based on the speed sensor
tion.
The location of the vehicle icon is may be incorrect.
If this does not correct the vehicle icon posi-
misaligned from the actual position. tion, contact a NISSAN/ INFINITI dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete
Updated road information will be included in
(the vehicle icon position is always misaligned
the next version of the map data.
in the same area).
RELATED TO ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE

Waypoints are not included in Waypoints that you have already passed are not included in If you want to go to that waypoint
the auto reroute calculation. the auto reroute calculation. again, you need to edit the route.
Set the destination and perform route
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
calculation.
Route information is not dis- You are not driving on the suggested route. Drive on the suggested route.
played. Route guidance is set to off. Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of roads
(roads displayed in gray).
The auto reroute calculation (or
detour calculation) suggests Route calculations took priority conditions into consider-
the same route as the one pre- ation, but the same route was calculated.
viously suggested.
A maximum of 5 waypoints can be set
Five waypoints are already set on the route, including ones on the route. If you want to go to 6 or
A waypoint cannot be added.
that you have already passed. more waypoints, perform route calcu-
lations multiple times as necessary.

A
Reset the destination to a main or or-
Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close. Set a more distant destination.
The suggested route is not dis-
B
Divide your trip by selecting one or two
played. The starting point and destination are too far away. intermediate destinations, and per-
form route calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Set [Use Time Restricted Roads] to C
time) near the current vehicle location or destination. off.
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If you
The part of the route that you passed the first waypoint, the section between the starting D
have already passed is deleted. point and the waypoint is deleted. (It may not be deleted de-
pending on the area.)
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads E
Adjust the location of the starting of
close to the starting point or destination, the system may
the starting point or destination.
suggest an indirect route.
An indirect route is suggested.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route
calculation does not take into consideration some areas
Reset the destination to a main or or- F
dinary road, and recalculate the route.
such as narrow streets (gray roads.)
The landmark information does
Updated information will be included G
not correspond to the actual in- This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data.
in the next version of the data.
formation.
The suggested route does not
Set the starting point, waypoints and
exactly connect to the starting There is no data for route calculation closes to these loca-
destination on a main road, and per- H
point, waypoints, or destinations.
form route calculation.
tion.
RELATED TO VOICE GUIDANCE I

Voice guidance is only available at certain intersections J
marked with? In some case, voice guidance is not avail- This is not a malfunction.
able even when the vehicle should make a turn.
Voice guidance is not available Go back to the suggested route or request K

The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
route calculation again
Voice guide is set to off. Turn on voice guidance.
Route guidance is set to off. Turn on voice guidance. L
The guidance contact does not
The contact of voice guidance may vary, depending on
correspond to the actual condi- Follow all traffic rules and regulations.
the types of intersections at which turn are made.
tion.
M
RELATED TO TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Symptom Possible cause Possible solution AV

The traffic information is not set to on. Set the traffic information to on.
You are in an area where traffic information is not avail- Scroll to an area where traffic information is
able available O
The traffic information is not
displayed You have not subscribed to XM NavTraffic or, your sub- Check your subscription status of XM
scription to XM NavTraffic has expired. NavTraffic.
The map scale is set at a level where the display of Check that the map scale is set at a level in P
icons is impossible. which the display of icons is possible.
The automatic detour search is not intend-
With the automatic detour route
There is no faster route compared to the current route, ed for avoiding traffic jams. It searches for
search ON, no detour route is
based on the road network and traffic information. the fastest route taking into consideration
set to avoid congested areas.
such things as traffic jams.

Observe the actual road condition and fol-
The route does not avoid road low the instructions on road for detour
The navigation system is designed not to avoid this
section with traffic information when necessary. If the road closure is for
event because the actual period of closure may differ
stating it is closed due to road certain, use detour function and set the de-
from the declared roadwork period.
construction. tour distance to avoid the closed road sec-
tion.
Traffic information displayed Observe the actual road conditions and
differs from information from Other media may use different information sources. regulations. Always observe safe driving
other media (e.g. radio). practices and follow all traffic regulations.

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
ual.
WARNING: E
F
ness connectors.
WARNING:
serious injury.
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis INFOID:0000000009471526
K
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
• Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less. L
• Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal before
checking the circuit.
Precaution for Harness Repair INFOID:0000000009471527 M
AV COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
• Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line AV
must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).]
PKIA0306E

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
• Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The
spliced wire will become separated and the characteristics of
twisted line will be lost.)
PKIA0307E
• If a part is specified as a non-reusable part, always replace it with a new one.
- Oily dirt:
area.
• Then dip a cloth into fresh water, wring the water out of the cloth and wipe the detergent off.

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
B
(TechMate No.) C
Tool name
(J-46534) D
Trim Tool Set
AWJIA0483ZZ
F

G
PIIB1407E
AV

AV CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [COLOR DISPLAY - W/BOSE & NAVI]
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

AV CONTROL UNIT
AWNIA1926ZZ
1. AV control unit 2. AV control unit bracket (LH) 3. AV control unit bracket (RH)
4. A/C auto amp. 5. Cluster lid C (with A/C and AV switch Clip
assembly attached)
AV CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION:
Before replacing AV control unit, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save current vehicle specifica-
tion. Refer to AV-337, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair
Requirement".

AV CONTROL UNIT
4. Remove the AV control unit screws (A), then pull out the AV con-
trol unit (1), disconnect the AV control unit connectors and A
remove the AV control unit (1).
ALNIA1131ZZ
D
Installation
CAUTION:
• When replacing AV control unit, perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION”. Refer to AV-337, "ADDITIONAL E
F
Removal
2. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View". G
H
J
ALNIA1215ZZ
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. K
AV

REMOVAL
2. Remove the four multifunction switch screws (A) and the multi-
function switch (2) from cluster lid D (1).
: Metal clip
AWNIA1917ZZ
INSTALLATION

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
A
L
AWNIA1928ZZ
1. Audio display unit bracket 2. Audio display unit 3. Cluster lid D M

Metal Clip
AV
REMOVAL
2. Remove the audio display unit bracket screws (A). O
and bracket assembly (1) and remove. P
ALNIA1139ZZ

AUDIO DISPLAY UNIT
5. Remove the audio display unit screws on the sides and the audio display unit from the audio display unit
brackets.
INSTALLATION

USB CONNECTOR
USB CONNECTOR
A
REMOVAL B
2. Push the pawl from the back of the center console to remove the
USB interface (1). C
ALNIA1401ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

AUX IN JACK
AUX IN JACK
REMOVAL
2. Remove the auxiliary input jacks screws (A) and auxiliary input
jacks (1).
ALNIA1162ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT TWEETER
FRONT TWEETER
A
REMOVAL B
C
D
F
AWNIA2220ZZ
INSTALLATION
AV

CENTER SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
REMOVAL
AWNIA2221ZZ
INSTALLATION

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
A
REMOVAL B
C
(1) and remove.
I
ALNIA1133ZZ
INSTALLATION J
AV

REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL
ALNIA1135ZZ
INSTALLATION

SUBWOOFER
SUBWOOFER
A
ALNIA1134ZZ
G
REMOVAL H
I
INSTALLATION
AV

BOSE SPEAKER AMP
BOSE SPEAKER AMP
ALNIA1137ZZ
REMOVAL
NOTE:
If removing the BOSE speaker amp. bracket, it is necessary to remove the parcel shelf finisher. The BOSE
4. Disconnect the harness connector from the BOSE speaker amp. and remove.
INSTALLATION

A
REMOVAL B
antenna. C
antenna (1).
D
ALNIA1141ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

GPS ANTENNA
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-10, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the audio unit. Refer to AV-652, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove the GPS antenna screw (A).
• GPS antenna (1)
ALNIA1142ZZ
4. Detach the GPS antenna cable clip (A), then fish the GPS
antenna connector and harness (1), through the cluster lid A
instrument panel opening and remove the GPS antenna.
ALNIA1143ZZ
INSTALLATION

STEERING SWITCH
STEERING SWITCH
A
REMOVAL B
C
(B).
D
ALNIA1132ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

AUDIO ANTENNA
AUDIO ANTENNA
AWNIA1765ZZ
7. Satellite radio antenna
ELEMENT CHECK
each side.
SEL250I

SEL122R

AUDIO ANTENNA
2. If an element is broken, no continuity will exist. A
G
SEL252I
3. To locate a break, move probe along element. Tester indication H

SEL253I K
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long L
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol M
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1. Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a AV
drawing pen. O
NOTE:
3. Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver P
PIIA0215E

AUDIO ANTENNA
nuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
SEL012D

tance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
hours.
SEL013D

ANTENNA AMP.
ANTENNA AMP.
A
REMOVAL B
C
(1).
D
ALNIA0043ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
G
AV

MICROPHONE
MICROPHONE
REMOVAL
ALNIA0928ZZ
ALNIA0929ZZ
4. Release the microphone tabs (A), then remove the microphone

(1).
ALNIA0930ZZ
INSTALLATION

REAR VIEW CAMERA
REAR VIEW CAMERA
A
REMOVAL B
C
F
ALNIA1156ZZ
INSTALLATION
H
REAR VIEW CAMERA
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement". I
AV

Av PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Av PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA

Revision: August 2013 AV-1 2014 Maxima NAM

FRONT TWEETER ............................................ 76 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 102

Revision: August 2013 AV-2 2014 Maxima NAM

AMP ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT ............................. 122 CENTER SPEAKER ........................................ 165

BOSE SPEAKER AMP ................................... 169 G

MONOCHROME DISPLAY .............................. 138 TEL ANTENNA ............................................... 176

Revision: August 2013 AV-3 2014 Maxima NAM

MICROPHONE ........................................................ 237 SATELLITE RADIO TUNER .................................... 262

DISPLAY UNIT ................................................ 274 M

Revision: August 2013 AV-5 2014 Maxima NAM

PREPARATION ............................................... 310 REAR VIEW CAMERA ..................................... 334

Revision: August 2013 AV-6 2014 Maxima NAM

Revision: August 2013 AV-7 2014 Maxima NAM

VERTICAL SYNCHRONIZING (VP) SIGNAL SATELLITE RADIO TUNER ............................. 445

Revision: August 2013 AV-8 2014 Maxima NAM

MICROPHONE ................................................. 501 DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AV CONTROL UNIT) . 525 P

Revision: August 2013 AV-10 2014 Maxima NAM

SUBWOOFER .................................................. 597 AUX IN JACK .................................................. 658

Revision: August 2013 AV-12 2014 Maxima NAM

Revision: August 2013 AV-13 2014 Maxima NAM

Revision: August 2013 AV-14 2014 Maxima NAM

System Description INFOID:0000000009471159 H

Revision: August 2013 AV-15 2014 Maxima NAM

1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Display unit M109 3. Tweeter RH M144

Revision: August 2013 AV-16 2014 Maxima NAM

Part name Description

• Receives and displays signals from the Bluetooth® control unit. F

Revision: August 2013 AV-17 2014 Maxima NAM

System Description INFOID:0000000009471163

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT

Revision: August 2013 AV-18 2014 Maxima NAM

1. Tweeter LH M143 2. Display unit M109 3. Tweeter RH M144

Revision: August 2013 AV-19 2014 Maxima NAM

Part name Description

Display unit • Receives display signals from Bluetooth® control unit.

Bluetooth® antenna Sends telephone voice signal to Bluetooth® control unit.

Revision: August 2013 AV-20 2014 Maxima NAM

Self-diagnosis mode can perform the following items. B

VERSIONS DISPLAY FUNCTION

Revision: August 2013 AV-21 2014 Maxima NAM

4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

4. The diagnosis default screen of audio display unit is displayed.

Revision: August 2013 AV-22 2014 Maxima NAM

4 Preset button “4” switch

Key check item (steering switch) J

Key check STR UP MENU up switch

STR TEL END switch

STR TEL SEND

6. Self-diagnosis mode is canceled when the ignition switch is turned OFF.

Revision: August 2013 AV-23 2014 Maxima NAM

Display item Description

Revision: August 2013 AV-24 2014 Maxima NAM

BLUETOOTH® CONTROL UNIT INITIALIZATION CHECKS C

test will be performed. Follow the voice prompt. If the micro-

Failure Message Action

“Bluetooth® antenna open” 1. Inspect harness connection.

Revision: August 2013 AV-25 2014 Maxima NAM

Revision: August 2013 AV-26 2014 Maxima NAM

Are the voltage results as specified?

Revision: August 2013 AV-27 2014 Maxima NAM

Unit Terminals Signal name Fuse No.

Unit Terminals Signal name Fuse No.